NEC UNIVERGE SL2100 Features And Specifications Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 677 / 978

background image

Related Features

Central Office Calls, Answering

Central Office Calls, Placing

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Paging, External

Programmable Function Keys

Ring Groups

Ecology

Guide to Feature Programming

The programs listed below indicate the most commonly used programs required for this feature. The
programs are listed in the order that the installer should follow. Refer to the PCPro wizards for further
detailed programming.

• When a * is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that

MUST

be set (from a

default state) for this feature to be enabled.

Manual Night Mode

Program

No.

Program Name

Input Data

Default

12-01-01

Night Mode Function Setup - Manual Night Mode
Switching

0 = Off (Manual Night Mode
changes are not allowed.)
1 = On (Manual Night Mode
changes are allowed.)

1

12-05-01

Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions -
Night Mode Service Group Number

1 = Night Mode Group 1
2 = Night Mode Group 2
3 = Night Mode Group 3
4 = Night Mode Group 4

1

12-06-01

Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks -
Night Mode Service Group Number

1 = Night Mode Group 1
2 = Night Mode Group 2
3 = Night Mode Group 3
4 = Night Mode Group 4

1

12-07-01

Text Data for Night Mode - Text Message

Maximum 12 Characters (alpha-
betic or numeric)

Mode 1 = No Setting

Mode 2 = <Night>

Mode 3 = <Mid-night>

Mode 4 = <Rest>

Mode 5 = <Day2>

Mode 6 = <Night2>

Mode 7 = <Midnight2>

Mode 8 = <Rest2>

12-08-01

Night Mode Service Range - Range

2 ~ 8

2

12-08-02

Night Mode Service Range - Lamp setting of tog-
gle key

0 = Off
1 = On

0

20-01-17

System Options - Day/Night Change Key Mode

0 = Toggle (Will follow PRG
12-08-01.)
1 = Skip (When pressed the sys-
tem will step to the next night
mode time period in PRG 12-02.)

0

ISSUE 1.0

SL2100

Features and Specifications Manual

1-663

N

«
...
675
676
677
678
679
...
»

Summary of Contents for UNIVERGE SL2100

Page 1: ...Features and Specifications Manual GVT 010794 401 00 AU ISSUE 1 0 May 2017 ...

Page 2: ...ogies is a trademark or service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are trademarks of Nortel Networks Verizon Wireless is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services LLC Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Android is a trademark of Google Inc iPhone iPad is a trademar...

Page 3: ...Keys 1 102 Call Duration Timer 1 106 Call Forwarding 1 108 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 1 119 Call Forwarding Off Premise 1 122 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override 1 132 Call Monitoring 1 134 Call Redirect 1 138 Call Waiting Camp On 1 140 Callback 1 144 Caller ID Call Return 1 147 Caller ID 1 149 Caller ID Flexible Ringing 1 160 Central Office Calls Answering 1 167 Central Office Calls Placi...

Page 4: ...2 Handset Mute Handset Cutoff 1 334 Handsfree and Monitor 1 336 Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing 1 338 Headset Operation 1 340 Hold 1 342 Hotel Motel 1 346 Hotel Motel Do Not Disturb 1 354 Hotel Motel DSS Console Monitoring 1 357 Hotel Motel Message Waiting 1 361 Hotel Motel PMS Integration TBD 1 364 Hotel Motel Room Status 1 368 Hotel Motel Room Status Printout 1 373 Hotel Motel Room ...

Page 5: ...ff 1 614 Mobile Extension 1 616 Mobile Extension Callback to Mobile Phone 1 627 Multiple Trunk Types 1 631 Multi Device Support 1 633 Music on Hold 1 642 Name Storing 1 645 Navigation Key 1 647 Night Service 1 661 Off Hook Signaling 1 668 One Touch Calling 1 672 Operator 1 675 Paging External 1 677 Paging External VRS 1 681 Paging Internal 1 683 Park 1 686 PBX Compatibility Behind PBX 1 692 PC Pro...

Page 6: ...s 1 846 Trunk Queuing Camp On 1 849 Unicast Multicast Paging Mode 1 851 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 856 Universal Slots 1 862 User Programming Ability 1 865 Video Conference with Web RTC 1 866 Virtual Extensions 1 879 Voice Mail Integration Analog 1 887 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys 1 898 Voice Melody Ringing by VM 1 901 Voice Over 1 907 Voice Response System VRS 1 910 Voice Respo...

Page 7: ...SMTP Server Settings 1 449 Table 1 25 Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals 1 449 Table 1 26 Turn Email Notification On or Off 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 1 453 Table 1 27 Park and Page Call Handling 1 462 Table 1 28 Park and Page Call Handling 1 462 Table 1 29 Recording Your Paging Message 1 464 Table 1 30 Setting the Call Handling Options 1 465 Table 1 31 Picking Up a Pa...

Page 8: ...ble 1 62 Station Application 1 810 Table 1 63 Trunk Application 1 811 Table 1 64 TAPI Commands 1 826 Table 1 65 Recommended Client Device Specifications 1 868 Table 1 66 Hardware Specifications 1 869 Table 1 67 Example of Bandwidth Utilization 1 869 Table 1 68 Common Errors 1 877 Table 1 69 Special Conditions 1 878 Table 1 70 WAV Format 1 901 Table 1 71 Default Incoming Ringing Tone 1 921 Table 1 ...

Page 9: ...rsal 1 484 Figure 1 24 Example of LCD indication for out of range 1 499 Figure 1 25 Out of Range transfer Flow Chart 1 500 Figure 1 26 Example SIP Terminal 1 508 Figure 1 27 Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart 1 551 Figure 1 28 Example PRG93 03 xx 1 575 Figure 1 29 Sample Image 1 576 Figure 1 30 Sample Image 1 577 Figure 1 31 Mobile Extension Layout 1 616 Figure 1 32 Example Callback to Mobile Ph...

Page 10: ...e ID 1 872 Figure 1 56 Conference Screen with Toolbar 1 874 Figure 1 57 Switch Button for Video Screen Sharing 1 876 Figure 1 58 NEC Screen Sharing Window 1 876 Figure 1 59 Example of Users Sharing Window 1 877 Figure 1 60 Stop Screen Sharing or Camera Switch Window 1 877 Figure 1 61 VRS User Pro Login Diagram 1 921 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 viii Features and Specifications Manual ...

Page 11: ...er information regarding the environmentally sound collection recycling and disposal of the battery Sealed lead batteries must be returned to an approved sealed lead battery recycler This may be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive batteries Contact your local waste management officials for other information regarding the environmentally sound collection recycli...

Page 12: ...FORMATION This equipment has been tested to comply with all relevant Australia and New Zealand regulatory requirements Warning Small metal objects such as staples and pins may be caught and held in the earpiece and that the user should be aware and careful to prevent any accident from such an event The SL2100 system must be permanently connected to protective earth UL REGULATORY INFORMATION This e...

Page 13: ...of this telecommunication system NEC hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license POWER FAILURE The NEC SL2100 system is operated on 230VAC Mains power The System and Terminals will not operate when the mains power fails unless Battery Back up or a UPS is connected If emergency telephone use is required a Battery back up or UPS needs to be connected ISSUE 1 0 ...

Page 14: ...MEMO SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 R 4 Regulatory ...

Page 15: ... SECTION 2 FEATURES Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operation with One Touch Keys A Multiline Terminal user can access many features Service Codes e g Service Code 744 sets Call Forward Busy No Answer To streamline the operation of their telephone a Multiline Terminal user can store these codes under One Touch Keys This provides one button operation for almost any feature To find out more turn to t...

Page 16: ... for Trunks The system detects the type of unit trunk or extension and assigns the required extension or trunk ports to the slot The system will use the next available port numbers it will not reserve any SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 2 Features ...

Page 17: ...ry key enter the Speed Dial bin name Speaker key to place call The Speaker key and service code 2 operations are not available for any 4 digit Speed Dial System bin number DSS Console Chaining DSS Console chaining allows an extension user with a DSS Console to chain to a not an Speed Dialing number stored under a DSS Console key The stored number dials out chains to the initial call This can for e...

Page 18: ...ension can have a One Touch Key for Speed Dial operation If you enter a PBX trunk access code in a Speed Dial bin the system automatically inserts a pause after the bin Single Line Terminals can dial only System and Group Speed Dial numbers Toll Restriction may prevent a user from using a stored Speed Dial number Unless selected by the user Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk Speed Dial uses for...

Page 19: ...der that the installer should follow Refer to the PCPro wizards for further detailed programming When a is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled System Speed Dial Program No Program Name Input Data Default 13 01 01 Speed Dialing Function Setup Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode 0 Trunk Outgoing Mode Use trun...

Page 20: ...Off Deny 1 On COS 01 15 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys 27 Common Private Speed Di al Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command Additional Data for Group Speed Dial Program No Program Name Input Data Default 13 03 01 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions Speed Dial Group 01 50 Assign group number for exten sion 1 13 0...

Page 21: ...DTMF Dial Tone Detection Setup DTMF Dial Tone Detection 0 Common use for both analog extensions and trunks 1 Use for analog exten sions DTMF receivers 2 Use for analog trunks DTMF receivers Dial tone Detection Caller ID detection Resource 01 140 0 13 04 03 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer Mode 0 Not Used Calls will not be routed based off a users caller ID 1 Internal Dial Calls will be route...

Page 22: ...o 35 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 3 25 dBm 0 to 40 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 4 30 dBm 0 to 45 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 5 35 dBm 0 to 50 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 6 40 dBm 0 to 55 dBm 15 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 03 04 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Max Detect Level 0 15 DTMF Tone 0 0 dBm 0 to 15 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 1 5 dBm 0 to 20 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 2 10 dBm 0 to 25 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 3 15 dBm 0 to 30 dBm 15 DTMF T...

Page 23: ...nual for the default values 80 04 05 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Pulse Count 1 255 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 04 06 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Mini mum Time 1 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 04 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Maxi mum Time 0 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer to the Program ming Manual for th...

Page 24: ...nter characters π Σ σ Ω Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space Clear Back or DND 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal Clear the character entry one character at a time Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right...

Page 25: ...a DSS Console you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number To store a Speed Dialing number under a Programmable Function Key 1 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key 2 Dial 751 3 Press the key where the number is to be stored 4 Dial 27 System Speed Dial Dial 28 Group Speed Dial 5 Dial Speed Dial Bin number to put under the key 6 Press Speaker key to hang up To dial a Spe...

Page 26: ...ress Enter Cursor key to confirm a name and number 5 Press Speaker key or Lift handset The stored number dials out Unless selected by the user Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call If you have a DSS Console you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number To check your stored Speed Dialing numbers When set PRG 15 02 60 0 1 Press Help key 2 For System Speed Dialin...

Page 27: ...to search 3 Press Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to select the destination name 4 Press Enter Cursor key to confirm a name and number 5 Press Exit key to return to idle condition To store a Station Speed Dialing number 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 755 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed 0 9 1 Station Speed Dial buffer 1 2 Station Speed Dial buffer 2 0 Station Speed Dial bu...

Page 28: ...r all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right 7 Press Hold key 8 Press Speaker key to hang up To store a Station Speed Dialing number Single Line Terminals only 1 Lift the Handset 2 Dial 755 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed 0 9 1 Station Speed Dial Buffer 1 2 Station Speed Dial Buffer 2 3 Station Speed Dial Buffer 3 4 Station Speed Dial Buffer...

Page 29: ...k Group Routing selects the trunk for the call The system may optionally select a specific Trunk Group for the call If you have a DSS Console you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number To dial a Station Speed Dialing number Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the Handset 2 Station Speed Dial 7 Group Speed Dial 4 System Speed Dial 2 3 Dial the Speed Dial Memory Location Station ...

Page 30: ...his can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code if Forced or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list The notification is an automatic Intercom call to the attendant and a RESTRICT message in the operator display Account Codes for Incoming Calls The system allows extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls When this option is enabled a user can dial while on a...

Page 31: ...if they are hidden on the telephone display Do not use an asterisk within a PBX CTX access code when using Account Codes The causes the trunk to stop sending digits to the central office until another is entered Account Codes for incoming calls not available for Single Line Terminals When using Forced Account Codes Unverified for toll calls only the station follows the timer setting in PRG 21 01 1...

Page 32: ...ing Account Codes 0 Account Codes displayed 1 Account Codes not displayed 0 35 06 01 Verified Account Code Table Verified Account Code 1 9 0 Wild card Up to 16 digits No Setting 40 10 01 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS Fixed Message 0 Disable VRS fixed message will not be played 1 Enable VRS fixed message will be played 0 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys 50 Account Code Refer to the progr...

Page 33: ...e this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled be sure to choose a code programmed into your Verified Account Code list 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code Refer to Central Office Calls Placing on page 1 174 for more information 2 Dial OR Press your Account Code key PRG 15 07 0...

Page 34: ...ngle Line Terminals 1 Answer incoming call If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled the following steps dial digits out onto the connected trunk 2 Dial 3 Enter the Account Code 1 16 digits You can enter any code of the proper length 4 Dial To enter a Forced Account Code at a Single Line Terminal 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by dialing a code Refer to Central Office...

Page 35: ... Account Codes When using the Last Number Redial Save or Repeat Dial features the system does not retain Account Code information To redial any number with these features the user must enter an Account Code If a user enters 12345 203 926 5400 67890 if the Last Number Redial feature is used the system dials the number as 203 926 5400 67890 The 67890 is not treated as an Account Code Conditions If a...

Page 36: ...efault 14 01 11 Basic Trunk Data Setup Account Code Re quired 0 Disabled user cannot enter account codes using this trunk 1 Enabled user can enter ac count codes using this trunk 1 35 05 01 Account Code Setup Account Code Mode 0 Account Codes Disabled 1 Account Codes Optional This is for the account code en try feature 2 Account Code Required Not Verified Forced Account Codes enabled no verificati...

Page 37: ...ine Terminals 1 Dial OR Press your Account Code key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 code 50 2 Dial your Account Code 1 16 digits using 0 9 and If Account Codes are hidden each digit you dial shows an on the telephone display 3 Dial OR Press your Account Code key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 code 50 To enter an Account Code before dialing the outside number If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes you may us...

Page 38: ...ps dial digits out to the connected trunk 2 Dial 3 Enter the Account Code You can enter any code of the proper length Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified 4 Dial To enter an Account Code at a Single Line Terminal 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by dialing a code Refer to Central Office Calls Placing on page 1 174 for more information 2 Dial 3 Enter Account Cod...

Page 39: ...Conditions Single Line Terminals ring and Music on Hold is heard when the Alarm sounds Only a Multiline Terminal user can view what time the Alarm is currently set for Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals Any Station Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 20 01 06 System Options Alarm Duration 0 6480...

Page 40: ...R At the Single Line Terminal hang up To silence an alarm 1 At Multiline Terminal press Exit key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset The Single Line Terminal user hears Music on Hold when the handset is lifted To check the programmed alarm time at a Multiline Terminal 1 Press Help key 2 Dial 727 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 The programmed time displays 4 Press Exit key To cancel an alarm 1...

Page 41: ...Date and time an extension was disconnected from the system Date and time of any system data change Table 1 2 Sample Alarm Report Alarm Report 05 16 2006 14 30 PAGE 001 LVL NO STAT DATE TIME ITEM UNIT SLT PRT PARAMETER MIN 0002 REC 05 16 06 14 21 PKG Installation PRIU 02 00 MAJ 0010 ERR 05 16 06 14 21 ISDN Link PRIU 02 12 MAJ 0010 REC 05 16 06 14 21 ISDN Link PRIU 02 12 MIN 0002 ERR 05 16 06 14 33...

Page 42: ... nal is unplugged or wire is disconnected System Data Change System Upgrade performed or Programming change System Start Up System is reset SMDR Link Connection failure is detected between the CPU and SMDR printer device STA DSP for IP Station Call were all busy TRK DSP for Trunk Call were all busy includes SIP trunks NET DSP SL Net Call when all DSP resource is busy Conditions Alarm reports can n...

Page 43: ... DIMDUMP PRG 90 11 14 YES PRG 47 18 SMTP Client uses is necessary Alarm Report per event When an alarm occurs an alarm report will be sent by E mail PRG 90 10 02 System Alarm Setup Report 1 Yes PRG 90 11 02 Alarm Report SMTP Setting Report Method 1 E mail Alarm Report per period According to the PRG 90 24 Alarm Report Notification Time Setup an alarm report will be sent by E mail DIMLAST DIMDUMP N...

Page 44: ...t 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December 0 Disable 90 24 02 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Day 00 31 0 Not Set 0 Disable 90 24 03 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Hour 00 23 0 Disable 90 24 04 System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup Minute 00 59 0 Disable Printing Reports Program No Program Name Input Data Default 90 12 01 System Alarm Output Output Port Type 0 ...

Page 45: ...t SMTP Setting To E mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting 90 11 09 Alarm Report SMTP Setting Reply Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting 90 11 10 Alarm Report SMTP Setting From Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting 90 11 13 Alarm Report SMTP Setting Customer Name Up to 255 Characters No Setting 90 11 14 Alarm Report SMTP Setting Use Standard SMTP Settings 0 No 1 Yes 0 90 11 15 Alarm Rep...

Page 46: ... 48 characters No Setting 47 19 02 POP3 Setup POP3 Port 0 65535 110 47 19 03 POP3 Setup Encryption 0 No 1 Yes 0 47 19 04 POP3 Setup User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting 47 19 05 POP3 Setup Password Up to 48 characters No Setting Operation To use this feature at any terminal The user must be logged in with an Installer IN level password as defined in PRG 90 02 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 32 Alarm Report...

Page 47: ...ed when BGM or Navigation mode PRG 15 02 60 is enabled When Navigation is enabled contrast can be changed using a Navigation mode Default Settings Enabled for all display telephones System Availability Terminals All Display Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Clock Calendar Display Time and Date Selectable Display Messaging Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program...

Page 48: ...rican Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish 16 Russian 17 Simplified Chinese 18 Traditional Chinese 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 11 08 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Information Display 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 Operation Operation is automatic if enabled in programming SL...

Page 49: ...o at 082U B1 Relay Control Each 082U B1 boards have two relay ports RL Audio Relay1 2 The System can have maximum of 11 relay ports These relays can be used for External MOH BGM resource External Speaker or Door Phone control in accordance with PRG 10 61 01 to PRG 10 61 04 settings Conditions Interface Specifications Relay Contacts Maximum Contact Ratings 48 VDC 320 mA Normally Open BGM ExMOH Sour...

Page 50: ...et except 4th Slot Slot No 4 8 12 0 10 60 03 Audio Port Setup External Speaker Channel 1 Slot No 0 3 5 7 9 11 Each chassis can be set except 4th Slot Slot No 4 8 12 0 10 60 04 Audio Port Setup External Speaker Channel 2 Slot No 0 3 5 7 9 11 Each chassis can be set except 4th Slot Slot No 4 8 12 0 10 60 05 Audio Port Setup External Speaker Channel 3 Slot No 0 3 5 7 9 11 Each chassis can be set exce...

Page 51: ...t 4 1 6 Door Phone No 1 6 0 10 61 03 Relay Port Setup Relay Port 2 0 No Setting 1 External MOH 2 BGM resource 3 External Speaker 4 Door Phone 0 10 61 04 Relay Port Setup Destination Selection 2 In case PRG 10 61 01 is set 1 or 2 Not Used In case PRG 10 61 01 is set 3 1 3 External Speaker message No 1 3 In case PRG 10 61 01 is set 4 1 6 Door Phone No 1 6 0 Operation None ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features a...

Page 52: ...ional device fits underneath the terminal Default Settings None System Availability Terminals IP7WW 12 24TXH B1 Multiline Terminal Required Component s WHA Wireless Headset Adapter Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 10 03 10 ETU Setup ESIU PKG Setup Bottom Option In formation 0 None 4 WHA 0 15 05 20 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup B...

Page 53: ...Operation Depends on the connected ancillary device ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 39 A ...

Page 54: ...calls placed in a Park Group by another user the LED blinks slow red The Answer Hold Automatic Hold Feature is not available for Virtual Extensions The Answer Hold Automatic Hold Feature does not function for incoming internal calls CO PBX incoming calls not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group do not activate the Answer Hold feature If the direct trunk appearance key is not assigned...

Page 55: ... Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override 0 Off 2nd call will not be al lowed 1 On 2nd call is allowed COS 01 15 1 Operation To answer a call on a different line key with a call in progress 1 Receive a CO PBX DID DISA DIL incoming ring The line key LED flashes 2 Press the line key and answer the new call The line key LED goes out The original call is put on hold 3 If...

Page 56: ...ws calls to route as if they were part of a single much larger system Centralized Voice Mail Centralized Voice Mail allows multiple networked systems to share a single voice mail system This centralised voice mail can receive calls from and transfer calls to any destination in any network node Unanswered calls recall and route as if they were part of a single much larger system ICM calling between...

Page 57: ...nteed Therefore NEC recommends connecting the VoIP equipment through a fully managed data network with Quality of Service QOS implemented For a network to be suitable for VoIP it must pass specific requirements The requirements are One way delay must not exceed 150 ms Round trip delay must not exceed 300 ms Packet loss must not exceed 1 Data switches must be manageable No half duplex equipment may...

Page 58: ... trunk when they are all busy the word Busy will be in the display and the user will hear Busy Tone but the key will not light up Camp On across AspireNet is only supported to a Busy extension Hold Transfer and Park recall timers will follow the timer of the system where the call is on hold Trunk and Station For example a user in Site A calls a user in Site B Site B answers the call and places the...

Page 59: ... Flexible Ringing does not work for incoming calls via the AspireNet network For the calls to route based on caller ID the programming must be performed in the system that contains the CO trunks Routing to other system s extensions is available however the ringing patterns will not be followed Directory Dialing will not list extension numbers in remote AspireNet systems Distinctive Ringing pattern...

Page 60: ...ailability Terminals All Terminal types are supported Required Component s IP7 CPU C1 IP7WW VOIPDB C1 AspireNet License SL2100 ASPIRENET 01 LIC Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming The programs listed below indicate the most commonly used programs required for this feature The programs are listed in the order that the installer should follow Refer to the PCPro wizards for further det...

Page 61: ... 128 0 10 20 01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TCP Port Available values are 0 65535 External Device 1 CTI Server 0 External Device 2 ACD MIS 0 External Device 4 Net working System 0 External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 8 UC Web Application 0 External Device 9 1st Party CTI 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 E...

Page 62: ... 12 05 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer average 0 300 ms 60 84 12 06 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer max 0 255 ms 120 84 12 07 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 729 Audio Frames 1 10 ms 2 20 ms 3 30 ms 4 40 ms 5 50 ms 6 60 ms 3 84 12 08 Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 VAD mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 84 12 09 N...

Page 63: ...rmation Basic Setup RTP Filter 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Enable Include SSRC 1 84 35 01 VoIPDB RFC2833 Playout Setup RFC2833 Play out Level 0 depend on RFC2833 1 Configuration 0 84 35 02 VoIPDB RFC2833 Playout Setup RFC2833 Play out Level High 1 33 dBm 28 6 dBm 28 84 35 03 VoIPDB RFC2833 Playout Setup RFC2833 Play out Level Low 1 33 dBm 28 6 dBm 28 Call Routing Outbound Program No Program Name Input Da...

Page 64: ... With Incorrect Dialing Incoming Group Number 0 Disconnect 01 50 Incoming Ring Group 102 VMI 103 Centralized VM 104 Assign the Speed Dial Number 1 25 04 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy Incoming Group Number 0 Disconnect 01 50 Incoming Ring Group 102 VMI 103 Centralized VM 104 Assign the Speed Dial Number 0 26 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR Additional Data Service Number ...

Page 65: ...107 and 108 First 8 ports ringing Call Routing Inbound DID When a is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 22 01 06 System Options for Incoming Calls DID Ring No Answer Time 0 64800 seconds 20 22 01 07 System Options for Incoming Calls DID Incom ing Ring Group No Answe...

Page 66: ... feature to be enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Extension Group Pilot Number Dial Up to 8 digits Group Number 1 49 No Setting Group Number 50 3999 14 01 22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID to Voice Mail 0 Disable Caller ID not sent to VM 1 Enable Caller ID is sent to VM 1 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type 0 ...

Page 67: ... 13 VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceller Setup Tx HLC Threshold 0 42 42 dBm 0 dBm 0 42 dBm 1 41 dBm 42 0 dBm for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 41 84 38 14 VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceller Setup Tx Signal Limiter mode 0 Disable 1 Enable for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 0 84 38 15 VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceller Setup Tx Signal Limiter Threshold 0 42 42 dBm 0 dBm 0 42 dBm 1 41 dBm 42 0 dBm for SIP Trunk Profile...

Page 68: ...dset 2 Dial the pilot number of the Voice Mail PRG 45 01 07 Using the above method the caller will not log into their own box The caller will be prompted to enter the extension number they wish to use For the caller to log directly into the Voice Mail box of the calling extension 1 At a Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or Lift the Handset OR At a Single Line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial t...

Page 69: ...pear 6 Press Hold key 7 Press Speaker key Network Paging Users can perform Internal External or Combined page to any system in the network Paging to a networked system can only be activated by dialing a service code and the target network s system ID Operation To Make an Internal Page 1 At a Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or Lift the Handset OR At a Single Line telephone lift the handset 2 D...

Page 70: ... users within the network then place the extensions at each site in a different park hold group in PRG 24 03 Operation To Park a call in a system orbit 1 At a Multiline Terminal press the Park key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 04 orbit The Park Key LED lights If you hear busy tone the orbit is busy Try another orbit 2 Use Paging to announce the call 3 Press Speaker key or hang up the handset If not picked u...

Page 71: ... not have an appearance for the queued call it waits in line to be answered If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent non programmable system feature Conditions Forwarding when unanswered or busy can occur only at the attendant if there are more than 32 calls in queu...

Page 72: ... Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing 0 Off Calls are not queued 1 On Calls are queued COS 01 15 0 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension Num ber Up to eight digits 101 24 02 01 Transfer System Options Transfer to busy Ex tension 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 Operation None SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 58 Attendant Call Queuing A ...

Page 73: ...hould hear a Queue Alarm when the time in queue portion reoccurs This alarm is a single beep tone that reminds the supervisor to check the condition of the queue ACD Overflow With Announcements ACD offers extensive overflow options for another ACD Group For example a caller ringing in when all agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement called the 1st Announcement This announcement can...

Page 74: ...mum to log in using the same AIC code AIC and ACD groups for each work period mode pattern number can be set in Program 41 18 01 as shown in the following example Table AIC Operation Group Mode Pattern Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 789 1 1 1 2 789 1 2 1 3 789 1 8 1 4 567 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 5 678 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 678 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 7 678 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EXAMPLE With this example ACD works as foll...

Page 75: ...he conversation Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced ACD Agents that need technical advice or assistance with a difficult caller The supervisor can easily listen to the conversation and then jump in if the situation gets out of hand Enhanced DSS Operation A programmed extension user can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the ACD Agents in a group The DSS Console is an esse...

Page 76: ...grammed on an ACD agent s telephone when the agent is in rest mode the key is lit If the Rest Mode key is pressed while an agent is on a call the key flashes to indicate a pre Rest Mode status When the current call is finished the agent s telephone is in rest mode The agent can place intercom calls or receive direct incoming calls while in Rest Mode The ability to receive incoming intercom calls i...

Page 77: ...erwork is a requirement for every call When the agent is done with their work they manually return themselves to the ACD Group or can be programmed to automatically return to the ACD Group Hotline Key Shows Agent Status An extension Hotline key provides the normal Busy Lamp Field BLF for co workers and a unique BLF for ACD Agents Like the DSS Console BLF the unique BLF shows when the covered agent...

Page 78: ...rammable function key The Multiline terminal user can press this key anytime while idle and using the VOL and VOL scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the ACD Groups The Queue Status Displays shows see the Queue Status Display illustration below The number of calls queued The trunk that has been waiting the longest and how long it has been waiting 2 LINE 001 01 30 The number of calls in...

Page 79: ...phone based on the settings in Programs 41 20 xx The supervisor must use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key to view the queue ACD Group as Overflow Destination The system can transfer an overflow call to a specific ACD Group off site via a speed dial bin Ring Group or to voice mail When Program 41 08 02 ACD Overflow Destination has the ACD Overflow Destination set to 1 8 the system...

Page 80: ...ments are used and a call is delivered to an available agent the agent MLT display shows how many delay announcements have been played no exclamations for no delay messages played or one exclamations for 1st delay played or two exclamations for 1st and 2nd delay message played while the call is ringing In order for Queue Depth Announcement to function an idle VRS Port must be available Therefore a...

Page 81: ...Component s ACD Software License SL2100 IN ACD LIC 2001 CPU Board Required Software None Related Features Direct Inward Dialing DID InMail Music on Hold Night Service Voice Mail Integration Analog ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 67 A ...

Page 82: ...econds 5 11 13 01 Service Code Setup for ACD ACD Log In Log Out for KTS 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 5 11 13 02 Service Code Setup for ACD Service Code Set up for ACD ACD Log Out for SLT 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 655 11 13 03 Service Code Setup for ACD Service Code Set up for ACD Set ACD Wrap Up Time for SLT 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 656 11 13 04 Service Code Setup for ACD Cancel ACD Wrap Up Time for SLT 0 9 ...

Page 83: ...in ID Code Digit 0 20 0 No Login ID 0 41 01 03 System Options for ACD ACD MIS Connection Ports 0 Not Set 3 LAN CPU 0 41 01 04 System Options for ACD ACD MIS Notification when ACD Call receives Busy 0 Notifies 1 No notification 0 41 01 05 System Options for ACD ACD MIS Output For mat 0 Classic 1 8 digit DDI Field 2 Extra DDI Event 3 XML Format 0 41 02 01 ACD Group and Agent Assignments ACD Group No...

Page 84: ... 0 41 08 02 ACD Overflow Options ACD Overflow Destina tion 0 No Setting 1 8 ACD Group 9 Overflow Table Program 41 09 10 Voice Mail Integration 11 System Speed Program 41 08 05 12 Incoming Ring Group Pro gram 41 08 06 0 41 08 03 ACD Overflow Options Delay Announcement Source Type 1 VRS 2 InMail 1 41 08 04 ACD Overflow Options ACD Overflow Transfer Time 0 64800 seconds 30 41 08 05 ACD Overflow Optio...

Page 85: ... to system superviso ry extension when group supervi sory extension is busy 0 41 14 02 ACD Options Setup Automatic Wrap Up Mode 0 After wrap up the mode key is pressed Manual 1 After call is finished automati cally Auto 0 41 14 03 ACD Options Setup ACD Priority for Overflow Calls 0 Own group priority 1 Priority order by Program 41 03 03 0 41 14 04 ACD Options Setup Automatic Answer at Head set 0 O...

Page 86: ...peration Mode 6 0 8 0 No Setting 1 8 ACD Group No 0 41 18 09 ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ACD Group Number in Operation Mode 7 0 8 0 No Setting 1 8 ACD Group No 0 41 18 10 ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ACD Group Number in Operation Mode 8 0 8 0 No Setting 1 8 ACD Group No 0 41 19 01 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement Delay Message Start Timer 0 64800 seconds 0 41 19 02 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announc...

Page 87: ...ncement Mailbox Options Hang Up After 0 None 1 Goodbye 2 Silent 0 92 04 01 Extension Data Swap 1st Extension Number Up to eight digits Refer to Programming Manual 92 06 01 Fill Command Source Number Each extension port 001 128 Program 11 02 Each virtual extension port 01 50 Program 11 04 Each extension group 1 50 Program 11 07 Each ACD Group 1 8 Refer to Programming Manual 92 07 01 Delete Command ...

Page 88: ...gout 1 YES 0 NO Enter 1 to log out The ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key goes out Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the ACD Log Out service code 655 Program 11 13 02 AIC Agent Log In To log in Multiline Terminal 1 Press the ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key Program 15 07 01 or SC 752 10 OR Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code Program 11 13 08 2 Dial the log in code up to 20 digits This step ...

Page 89: ...y Program 15 07 01 or SC 752 10 2 Dial 0 to cancel the log out option 3 Dial the Agent Identity Code AIC up to four digits The ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key lights OR Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code Program 11 13 08 4 Dial the Agent Identity Code AIC up to four digits The ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key lights Single Line Telephone Follow Steps 1 3 to log in with additional AICs up to three any...

Page 90: ... an idle state When Logged Out of ACD Group When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed in the ACD queue the telephone of the logged out agents displays the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system programming Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to idle until the time in Program 41 20 03 expires again Res...

Page 91: ...rminal 1 Press the ACD Rest Mode key Program 15 07 01 or SC 752 13 The ACD Rest Mode key light goes off Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset A fast busy is heard 2 Dial 659 3 Hang up ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 77 A ...

Page 92: ...atic Release is only available on incoming calls This feature functions while a call is in progress on hold or in a conference This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress holding or parked When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode Speaker automatically turns off If using the handset the station is set to idle when the handset goes on hook Default Settings None...

Page 93: ...0 7680 ms 0 not detect 1 255 60 7680 ms The formula is 30 30N When set to N 1 it means 30 30 1 60 When set to N 255 it means 30 30 255 7680 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 04 05 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Pulse Count 1 255 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 04 06 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Mini mum Time 1 255 30 30 7680 ms Refer t...

Page 94: ...refer to PRG 44 03 Time of Day Selection For routing purposes ARS provides 10 different day selections called Time Schedule Patterns Each Time Schedule Pattern can provide up to 20 time intervals which are assigned to one of the eight day night modes The Time Schedule Patterns are then assigned to a day of the week Monday Friday Saturday Sunday or Holiday Hierarchical Class of Service Control ARS ...

Page 95: ...oup 3 Group 3 5 2 214 1 Route to trunk group 1 Group 1 4 197 1 Route to trunk group 2 Group 2 4 198 1 Route to trunk group 3 Group 3 3 199 1 Route to trunk group 2 Group 2 2 200 1 Route to trunk group 1 Group 1 1 PRG 12 02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as Time Pattern No PRG 12 02 01 Start Time PRG 12 02 02 End Time PRG 12 02 03 Operation Mode 1 00 00 08 30 2 Night 2 08 30 17 00 1 Day 3 17 ...

Page 96: ...S installed Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route The system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset Speed Dialing may bypass ARS routing Set up other options for outgoing calls e g assigned line keys adjust gains ARS access key etc Refer to the Dial Tone Detection feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detectio...

Page 97: ...m a default state for this feature to be enabled ARS with trunk group routing Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Trunk Access Code Dial Up to four digits 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Setup Trunk Port 1 128 Priority 1 128 Trunk Group 0 50 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 26 01 01 Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route Serv ice ARS Servi...

Page 98: ...ARS service is OFF 1 Enabled ARS service is ON 0 26 02 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR Dial Maximum of 16 digits 0 9 No Setting 26 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR ARS Service Type 0 No Service Call Restricted 1 Route to Trunk Group 2 Select F Route Access 0 26 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR Additional Data Service Number If Service Type 1 in 26 02 Se lect Trunk Group Number 0 50 Tr...

Page 99: ...erence 0 F Route 1 ARS 0 26 02 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR Dial Maximum of 16 digits 0 9 No Setting 26 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR ARS Service Type 0 No Service Call Restricted 1 Route to Trunk Group 2 Select F Route Access 0 26 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR Additional Data Service Number If Service Type 1 in 26 02 Se lect Trunk Group Number 0 50 Trunk Group Number 0 No Ro...

Page 100: ...er to the Program ming Manual for the default values 12 02 02 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks End Time 0000 2359 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 12 02 03 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Op eration Mode 1 8 Night Modes 1 8 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 12 05 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Night Mode Service Group Number ...

Page 101: ... 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Di al Up to eight digits Use line key 1 for a Don t Care digit No Setting 44 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Service Type 0 No setting None 1 Extension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Option 0 44 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Additional Data 1 Delete Digit 0 255 255 Delete All Dig...

Page 102: ...dB 15 5 dB 32 0 dB 44 07 03 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access Outgoing Transmit 1 63 15 5 dB 15 5 dB 32 0 dB 44 07 04 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access Outgoing Receive 1 63 15 5 dB 15 5 dB 32 0 dB 80 03 01 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Detect Level 0 0 dBm 25 dBm 1 5 dBm 30 dBm 2 10 dBm 35 dBm 3 15 dBm 40 dBm 4 20 dBm 45 dBm 5 25 dBm 50 dBm 6 30 dBm 55 dBm Refer to the Program ming Manual for the defa...

Page 103: ...ual for the default values 12 03 01 Weekly Night Service Switching Night Mode Service Group Num bers 01 Sunday Time Pattern 1 02 Monday Time Pattern 2 03 Tuesday Time Pattern 3 04 Wednesday Time Pattern 4 05 Thursday Time Pattern 5 06 Friday Time Pattern 6 07 Saturday Time Pattern 7 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 12 04 01 Holiday Night Service Switching Days and Months 010...

Page 104: ...0 01 Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route Date 0101 1231 Schedule Pattern Number 0 10 0 No Setting 0 Operation To place a call using ARS 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset You hear normal Intercom dial tone 2 Dial 0 You hear a second stutter dial tone 3 Dial the outside number If you hear another stutter dial tone you must enter your extension...

Page 105: ...g interrupts Background Music Background Music is not available on Single Line Terminals Refer to Analog Communication Interface ACI for detail settings A service code to enable disable Background Music must be assigned in Program 11 11 18 Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s Externally provided Music Source Related Features Music on ...

Page 106: ...ground music on their station COS 01 15 1 10 61 01 Relay Port Setup Relay Port1 0 No Setting 1 External MOH 2 BGM resource 3 External Speaker 4 Door Phone 0 10 61 02 Relay Port Setup Destination Selection In case 10 61 01 is 1 or 2 Not Use In case 10 61 01 is 3 1 3 Ex ternal Speaker message No In case 10 61 01 is 4 1 6 Door Phone No 0 Not Used 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv...

Page 107: ...ties to the telephone conversation prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties Conditions An extension user can barge in on a conference An extension user cannot barge in on an Intercom call if one of the intercom callers is using Handsfree Answerback Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker key With PRG 20 13 10 s...

Page 108: ... 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Barge In Monitor 0 Speech 1 Monitor COS 01 15 0 20 13 15 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Barge In Initiate 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Ba...

Page 109: ...er of the busy internal party 2 Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710 To Barge In to a Conference Call 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key and dial the service code default 710 If the telephone does not have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system automatically places a callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS...

Page 110: ...ss of power just before ETU installation to provide battery backup for System Memory When fully charged the battery retains System Memory for approximately three years You should replace the CPU C1 battery every three years During normal operation the battery is continually recharged using a built in charging circuit from the CPU C1 Battery backup on the CPU does not protect the following Callback...

Page 111: ... Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 90 03 01 Save Data Save Data Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Operation None ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 97 B ...

Page 112: ...ation the batteries are continually recharged by a built in charging circuit External Battery Box can be connected to the system to back up the system in the event of commercial power outage Refer to the SL2100 System Hardware Manual for further details Default Settings None System Availability Terminals Not applicable Required Component s IP4WW Battery Box Related Features Battery Backup System M...

Page 113: ...nguage Australian English is available at default and it can be replaced to the other language by Web Programming Language Pack will be separately supplied To use more than two voice prompt languages SDVMS SDVML card must be installed on the CPU C1 When voice message is recorded the notification will be displayed on the operator terminal LCD set in PRG 20 17 01 Any operation off hook key depress a...

Page 114: ... 25 02 01 DID DISA VRS Message Message Talkie Source Talkie Type 1 Additional Data 1 40 07 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Madrid Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japa...

Page 115: ...ing party records the message max 2 minutes after beep tone 5 Finish the recording 6 Then following notification will be indicated at operator Multiline Terminal LCD VOICE MESSAGE xx MESSAGES xx indicates number of recorded messages 01 10 01 20 To retrieve recorded message 1 Press Speaker key dial 616 5 message number 001 100 at terminal 2 Recorded message is played To delete recorded message 1 Pr...

Page 116: ...ion can share a CAR key An extension can have more than one CAR key assigned Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key If multiple CAR SIE VE keys are ringing on a station at the same time the CAR SIE VE key on the lowest Line Key is answered first The system can be programmed to blink the page number of a DESI Less terminal when it receives an incoming call or switch to the page of th...

Page 117: ...al 7 Melody3 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 Melody4 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 0 15 09 01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Ringing 0 No Ringing 1 Ring 0 15 10 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Set up 0 8 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming extension ring tone 5 Melody1 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melody2 2W Digital IP Mult...

Page 118: ... Extension Group Number 0 50 0 No Setting 0 Operation To answer a call ringing a Call Arrival CAR key 1 Press the flashing Call Arrival CAR key To place a call to a Call Arrival CAR key 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the CAR key extension or press the Call Arrival CAR key The operation depends on the setting in PRG 15 02 21 To program a Call Arrival CAR key on a telephone 1 Press S...

Page 119: ...l the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker key ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 105 C ...

Page 120: ...s Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Alphanumeric Display Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 09 06 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Incomin...

Page 121: ...Operation To time your trunk calls 1 Place a trunk call The timer starts automatically ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 107 C ...

Page 122: ...e An extension user can also set the forwarding for another extension by using Call Forward for any Extension to Destination To redirect calls while a user is at another telephone use Call Forwarding with Follow Me A periodic VRS announcement can remind users that their calls are forwarded Conditions Virtual Extensions can be set to Call Forward PRG 15 02 21 must be set to a 1 to allow the Virtual...

Page 123: ...Terminal has Busy and No Answer Forwarding set to different locations and it loses connection it follows the Busy Forwarding location When the following are done in sequence Call Forwarding Busy No Answer is set to extension Call Forwarding Immediate is set on extension Call Forwarding Immediate is cancelled on extension then Call Forwarding Busy No Answer is set back on the extension When the fol...

Page 124: ...r per Trunk 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 734 11 10 08 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Set Trunk to Trunk Transfer Destination per Trunk 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 735 11 10 18 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 722 11 11 01 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward All 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 741 11 11 02 Service...

Page 125: ...it 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 793 11 11 58 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward with VAU Personal Greeting 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 713 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Forward Do Not Disturb Override 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 707 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup Do Not Dis turb Call Forward override 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 15 07 01 Programmable Fun...

Page 126: ... Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 03 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring All Call No Answer Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 04 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Sup...

Page 127: ...de 10 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press Speaker key or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function key turns off To set Call Forward Busy No Answer at a forwarding station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code default 744 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys PRG 15 07 01 13 or SC 751 Key Code 13 ...

Page 128: ...de 14 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press Speaker key or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function key turns off To set Call Forward Follow Me from the destination station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Follow Me Service Code default 746 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys PRG 15 07 01 10 or SC 751 Key Code 15 3 Dia...

Page 129: ...s Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code default 793 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number 5 Press Speaker key or hang up To cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extensio...

Page 130: ...ial 1 Set 4 Dial 1 INT to set the destination for Internal calls or 2 EXT to set the destination for External calls 5 Dial the destination extension or off premise number 6 Press Speaker key or hang up Refer to Call Forwarding on page 1 108 To cancel Call Forward All Split at a forwarding station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward All Split Service Code default 682 ...

Page 131: ... 1 108 To cancel Call Forward No Answer Split 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward No Answer Split Service Code default 684 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial 0 to cancel all Call Forward No Answer Split destinations 1 INT to cancel the destination for Internal calls or 2 EXT to cancel the destination for External calls 5 Press Speaker key or hang up To set Call Forward Busy No A...

Page 132: ...EXT to set the destination for External calls 5 Dial the destination extension Call Forward Both Ring Split does not support Off Premise destinations 6 Press Speaker key or hang up Refer to Call Forwarding on page 1 108 To cancel Call Forward Both Ring Split 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Both Ring Split Service Code default 686 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial 0 to cance...

Page 133: ...ll Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming DIL calls ring an idle Department Group member and then follow PRG 22 08 programming then PRG 22 05 programming Once Call Forwarding with Follow Me...

Page 134: ...l 1 to set 3 Dial the Extension to forward The Multiline Terminal with display indicates on the display of the telephone which Call Forward Follow Me is set Also the Programmed Follow Me Flexible Line Key flashes if assigned when Follow Me is set To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own Multiline Terminal 1 At your Multiline Terminal press Speaker key and dial Service Code 746 PRG 11 11 07 O...

Page 135: ...3 Dial 0 Cancel All Forward Follow Me OR Dial the extension number with Follow Me set ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 121 C ...

Page 136: ... 22 04 and PRG 22 05 Conditions If a call that forwards Off Premise goes out on a trunk assigned as TIE or DID and the called party does not answer before the timer in PRG 34 07 05 the call recalls to the station that performed the transfer Call Forwarding Off Premise requires loop start trunks with disconnect supervision The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot excee...

Page 137: ...Group Number 1 49 No Setting Group Number 50 3999 11 11 01 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward All 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 741 11 11 02 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward Busy 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 742 11 11 03 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward No Answer 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 743 11 11 04 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Opera...

Page 138: ...06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override 0 Off 2nd call will not be al lowed 1 On 2nd call is allowed COS 01 15 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing 0 Off Calls are not queued...

Page 139: ...ng 24 09 06 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for All Call No Answer Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 07 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for Busy Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks ...

Page 140: ...lled 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 Tie Line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 24 02 11 System Options for Transfer No Answer Step Transfer 0 64800 seconds 10 24 02 12 System Options for Transfer No Answer Trunk to Trunk Transfer 0 64800 seconds 0 24 04 01 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Target Setup Speed Dial Area Number 999 Trunk to Trunk Forwarding DID 3 Trunk Forwarding by Departmen...

Page 141: ...unction Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Department Groups 1 50 Priority Order 1 200 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension a...

Page 142: ...ccess codes are 0 ARS Trunk Group Routing 704 Line Group 1 9 01 50 or 0 Line number e g 05 or 005 for line 5 Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function key flashes To cancel Call Forwarding Off Premise non split 1 At a Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At a Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial the Call Forward Access Code default not assigned 3 Dial 0 Cancel To activate...

Page 143: ... 722 2 Dial the Door Box number 1 6 3 Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded 4 Press Speaker key or hang up at the Single Line Terminal to hang up To cancel Call Forwarding Off Premise for a Door Box 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key dial SC 722 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the Call Forward Device key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 54 OR At the Single...

Page 144: ...1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 734 3 Dial trunk port number to be used 001 128 4 Press Speaker key to hang up Department Group Line Forwarding Method 1 Set the Destination and Forward the Line 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 604 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 50 to be defined 4 Select the time mode 1 8 to be defined 5 Enter the telephone number which is the destination of the forwarded trunk The numbe...

Page 145: ... Dial bin must be defined in PRG 13 04 01 for the line to forward 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 602 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 50 to be defined 4 Press Speaker key to hang up Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 603 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 50 to be defined 4 Press Speaker key to hang up ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 131 C ...

Page 146: ...Name Input Data Default 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Forward Do Not Disturb Override 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 707 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup Do Not Dis turb Call Forward override 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 20 06 0...

Page 147: ... override an extension Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb 1 Call the forwarded or DND extension 2 Press the Override key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 37 or dial 707 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 133 C ...

Page 148: ...on and off Conditions An extension set as an operator in Program 20 17 01 cannot be monitored using the ACD Call Monitor 15 Feature key While using the ACD Call Monitor 15 Feature key if the monitored extension places the call on hold or transfers the call monitoring is stopped The ACD Call Monitoring 15 Feature key is supported on trunk calls and is not supported on internal calls If an extension...

Page 149: ...is used Mute can be used to activate speech path to the internal and external parties Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Barge In Conference Hold Intercom Park Programmable Function Keys InMail Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 12 08 Service Code Setup for Service Access Barge In ...

Page 150: ...3 45 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Mute Key Mode while Call Monitoring 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 14 11 Class of Service Options for DISA E M DISA Tie Trunk Barge In 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 18 07 Service Tone Timers Intrusion Tone Repeat Time 0 64800 seconds 0 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Inter digit Time External 0 64800 seconds 10 Operation The call must be...

Page 151: ...le Coaching Ability on and off To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability without first calling the busy extension 1 Press Speaker or lift the handset 2 Dial 710 or press the Barge In key Program 15 07 or SC 751 34 3 Dial a busy extension 4 Press MIC or Feature 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension using ACD Call Monitor 1 Call ...

Page 152: ...ected with the feature ACD Transferred Department Group all ring mode Door Box Virtual Extension Conditions After pressing the Call Redirect key the call does not recall to the extension The predefined destination must be an extension number or voice mail pilot number When a call is Redirected to another phone it does not follow the forwarding on that phone If the call redirect is set to go to an ...

Page 153: ...ervice for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 11 16 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 Operation To redirect a ringing call With an incoming call ringing your extension press the Call Redirect key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 49 Destination Extension Number without lifting the handset...

Page 154: ...unction keys code 35 If an extension user Camps On and then hangs up the system converts the Camp On to a callback Off Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 750 to Camp On and or DID callers from automatically camping on Function keys simplify Call Waiting Camp On operation An extension user may be able to Transfer a call to a busy extension Trunk Queuing let...

Page 155: ...f Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Intercom Off Hook Signaling 0 Off ICM off hook signaling disabled 1 On ICM off hook signaling enabled COS 01 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 20 18 06 Service Tone Timers Interval of Call Waiting Tone 1 64800 seconds 10 Below is a chart...

Page 156: ...d for all other available op tions in this command 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Block Camp On 0 Off Camp On blocked 1 On Camp On allowed COS 01 15 0 11 11 23 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Second Call for DID DISA DIL 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 679 11 12 47 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Waiting Answer Split Answer 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 794 15 02 ...

Page 157: ... handset and dial 770 To Split answer a waiting call at a Single Line Terminal Listen for Call Waiting tones 1 Hookflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls The operation depends on the setting in PRG 20 03 01 This operation is valid only before the caller performs the camp on operation refer To Camp on a busy extension step 2 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual ...

Page 158: ...m sets up an Intercom call between A and B Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring Conditions An extension can leave only one Callback...

Page 159: ...Options Callback Trunk Queuing Can cel Time 0 64800 seconds 64800 Operation To place a Callback 1 Call unavailable busy or unanswered extension 2 Dial 750 or press the Callback key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 35 3 Hang up 4 Lift the handset when busy extension calls you back If the unavailable extension was unanswered not busy the Callback goes through after your co worker uses their telephone for the fir...

Page 160: ...To test Callback at a Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 799 3 Hang up 4 When the telephone rings lift the handset You hear the Hold tone 5 Hang up SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 146 Callback C ...

Page 161: ...ey equipped telephone and Caller ID information is unavailable the voice mail system leaves the second line of the LCD blank When Caller ID is disabled on the system voice mail displays the message count Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while the post message playback menu is still displayed on a telephone equipped with Softkeys Live Record is not available when using Return Ca...

Page 162: ... not sent to VM 1 Enable Caller ID is sent to VM 1 14 02 10 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID 0 Off Caller ID not displayed 1 On Caller ID is displayed 1 15 02 04 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Redial Speed Dial Control 0 Common and Individual Speed Dialing 1 Group Speed Dialing 0 Operation None SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 148 Caller ID Call Return C ...

Page 163: ...for non ACD calls Once installed and programmed Caller ID is enabled for all trunk calls including Ring Group calls Calls transferred from another extension Calls transferred from the VRS Calls transferred from Voice Mail unscreened Direct Inward Lines DILs Caller ID temporarily stores 50 calls total of abandoned and answered unanswered New calls replace old calls when the buffer fills Temporary M...

Page 164: ...detect the Caller ID information If the Caller ID information is restricted the telephone display shows PRIVATE If the system cannot provide Caller ID information because Telco information is not detected the display shows NO CALLER INFO Option to Enable Caller ID Name for SLT System programming provides an option for Single Line Terminals to display Caller ID Caller ID Sender Queuing Added The SL...

Page 165: ...ID Data either the first or last character is missing based on the entry in PRG 20 19 01 If PRG 20 09 06 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Incoming Time Display is set to 1 On the first line displays the time and date PRG 15 07 01 button 63 when enabled removes the CPN from the setup message when making an outbound ISDN call this is a toggle enable disable button and can be used on a ...

Page 166: ...e The programs are listed in the order that the installer should follow Refer to the PCPro wizards for further detailed programming When a is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 20 09 02 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Caller ID Display 0 Off Caller ID...

Page 167: ...urn Up to four digits 0 1 9 No Setting 15 02 57 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller Log on busy 0 Off 1 On 0 15 03 10 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller Name 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 15 03 11 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Type 0 FSK 1 DTMF 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension...

Page 168: ...number in a Speed Dial bin Following operation is available for 2W Digital Multiline Terminal IP Multiline Terminal Only 1 With a Multiline Terminal in an idle condition the display shows 1 01 FRI 09 00AM 301 STA 301 LIST DIR ICM PROG 2 Press the List softkey OR Press the Left Cursor key twice and skip step 3 The display shows LIST MENU Redial CID 3 Press the CID softkey Caller ID The display show...

Page 169: ...ys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В Enter character...

Page 170: ...soft key The display shows the Calling History Total xx New xx Unans xx Ans xx All Unan Del Exit 3 Press All Soft Key The display shows first available caller number 01 nnnnnnnn Today 11 26 Call Store Del More 4 Press Up Down Cursor Key to choose the number yyyyyyyy Today 11 26 Call Store Del More 5 Press Store key to choose the number 01 nnnnnnnn Today 11 26 STA Abb 6 Press Abb key to select an A...

Page 171: ...ne Touch key Following operation is available for 2W Digital Multiline Terminal IP Multiline Terminal Only 1 With a telephone in an idle condition the display shows 1 01 FRI 09 00AM 301 STA 301 LIST DIR ICM PROG 2 Press the List softkey OR Press the Left Cursor key twice and skip step 3 The display shows LIST MENU Redial CID 3 Press the CID softkey Caller ID The display shows xxxxxxxxxxxxx mm dd h...

Page 172: ... are used the display shows TABLE IS FULL 7 Press 1 Yes to add 9 or 0 for Trunk Access Code The display shows OR Press 0 No for not adding Trunk Access Code The display shows SPD 01 9XXXXXXXXXX 8 Press Hold key The display shows SPD 01 9 Enter the name to be associated with the stored number Refer to Table 1 5 Keys for Entering Names on page 1 155 10 Press Hold key The display shows SPD Program 11...

Page 173: ...ess the PARK key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 04 With PRG 15 02 08 set to 1 One Touch and a call in park press Flash key then the PARK key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 04 Checking your Answered Unanswered Caller ID Calls To review the last 50 outside calls your extension received 1 At a display Multiline Terminal press the List softkey OR Press the Left Cursor key twice and skip step 2 2 Press the CID key 1st row o...

Page 174: ...e Caller ID number matches the common or group Speed Dial table PRG 13 04 This option can block calls on all trunks or it can be set on a per trunk basis Programming Examples for Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Various ring tone patterns and melodies for incoming calls are available when using PRG13 04 05 Flexible Ringing by Caller ID or PRG22 18 03 Private Caller ID For more detail about Flexible R...

Page 175: ...11 10 34 or Programmable Function Key code 87 To transfer the call with 2142622000 Caller ID incoming call to extension 301 as ring pattern 1 PRG 13 04 01 2142622000 PRG 13 04 03 1 extension number PRG 13 04 04 301 extension 301 PRG 13 04 05 1 tone pattern 1 To transfer the call with 2142622000 Caller ID incoming call to incoming ring group 2 as ring pattern 2 PRG 13 04 01 2142622000 PRG 13 04 03 ...

Page 176: ...ult is used Default Settings Not Installed System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Direct Inward Dialing DID Voice Response System VRS Guide to Feature Programming The programs listed below indicate the most commonly used programs required for this feature The programs are listed in the order that the installer should fo...

Page 177: ...P R P Pause R Recall Additional Digits when using ISDN functionality Maximum 36 Characters 2 Incoming Ring Group 0 50 IRG Number 3 Remote Monitor Dial Up to 8 digits No Setting 13 04 05 Speed Dialing Number and Name Incoming Ring Pattern 0 Normal System Ring Pattern 1 4 Tone Pattern 1 4 5 9 Scale Pattern 1 5 10 13 Tone Pattern 5 8 0 Caller ID Refuse for Specific Numbers Program No Program Name Inp...

Page 178: ... call will not transfer to a user in the sys tem can be routed to VRS mes sage in PRG 40 10 06 1 Internal Dial Specified in PRG 22 18 02 2 Incoming Ring Group Speci fied in PRG 22 04 0 22 18 03 Private Call Assignment Setup Incoming Ring Pattern Incoming Ring Pattern 0 13 0 Normal pattern 1 4 Tone pattern 1 4 5 9 Scale pattern 1 5 10 13 Tone pattern 5 8 0 40 10 06 Voice Announcement Service Option...

Page 179: ...nsion number Follow PRG 22 02 01 2 Caller ID Number exists Search refusing Speed Dial area PRG 22 16 data exists Search PRG 13 04 01 Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 07 PRG 14 01 27 1 And refuse mode is No No Yes Yes Off On Data matched Data unmatched 0 1 2 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 165 C ...

Page 180: ...aller ID PRG 22 18 01 Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 06 Ring the extension number Follow PRG 22 02 01 Disconnect the call Ring the incoming ring group Anything Else 2 Off On Private 0 1 2 Operation None SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 166 Caller ID Flexible Ringing C ...

Page 181: ...trunk number or dial any other codes to pick up the ringing trunk You normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night Answer refer to Night Service on page 1 661 When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External Paging an employee can answer the call from the first available telephone You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume ...

Page 182: ... the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting Line keys simplify answering outside calls If the Absent text message was set by the originating extension the destination extension displays the assigned text message instead of the Reason for Transfer message If an extension is assigned to a Trunk Access Map that ...

Page 183: ...mmable Function Keys Selectable Display Messaging Warning Tone for Long Conversation Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 10 03 XX ETU Setup Refer to Programming Manual 11 11 13 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Display Language Selection for Multiline Termi nal 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 678 11 12 30 Service Code Setup for Service Access Speci fied Trunk ...

Page 184: ...d Outgoing ac cess 7 Full access Access Map 1 128 Trunk Ports 1 128 as signed with option 7 ac cess incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 01 05 Basic Extension Data Setup Restriction for Out going Disable on Incoming Line 0 Supervise dial detection 1 Not supervise dial detection 0 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection 1 English 2 German...

Page 185: ...gital IP Multi line Terminal 5 Melody2 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melody3 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 7 Melody4 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 Melody5 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 0 20 02 09 System Options for Multiline Telephones Dis connect Supervision 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 1 20 02 15 System Options for Multiline Telephones Caller ID Display Mode 0 Name and Number Bo...

Page 186: ...ital IP Mul tiline Terminal Mode 7 Melody 4 2W Digital IP Mul tiline Terminal Mode 8 Melody 5 2W Digital IP Mul tiline Terminal Mode 9 Tone 5 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal Mode 10 Tone 6 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal Mode 11 Tone 7 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal Mode 12 Tone 8 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal Mode 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Extension Number Max...

Page 187: ...g over the Paging system 1 Go off hook Depending on system programming this may answer the call and you can skip step 2 2 Dial 9 If you hear error tone your extension Class of Service prevents Universal Answer To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 711 2 3 Select the ringing 1 8 you want to check 4 Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker ...

Page 188: ...omatically select the correct type of line to use based on the number dialed and the time With Automatic Handsfree an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call without lifting the handset or pressing Speaker key Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing Speaker key Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing ...

Page 189: ...ram No Program Name Input Data Default 10 03 XX ETU Setup Refer to Programming Manual 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Trunk Access Code Dial Up to four digits 0 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code 2nd Trunk Route Access Code Dial Up to four digits No Setting 11 10 27 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing Calls 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 645 11 11 13 Service Code Setup for Setup...

Page 190: ...ble Yes 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number 1 128 Trunk Port 0 50 Trunk Group No 1 128 Priority Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Trunk Group 0 Not Set 001 050 Trunk group No 101 150 100 Networking System No 1001 1050 1000 Route Ta ble No Refer to Programming Manual 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Access Map 0 No access 1 Outgoing access onl...

Page 191: ...for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 07 12 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Trunk Port Disable 0 Off 1 On COS1 14 COS15 1 20 08 02 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Trunk Outgoing Calls 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Continued Dialing DTMF Signal on...

Page 192: ...e Terminal press the trunk group key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 02 group 2 Dial the number To place a call using Trunk Group Routing 1 Go off hook 2 Dial 0 If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code you may dial that instead 3 Dial the number OR 1 At the Multiline Terminal press the Trunk Group Routing key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 752 02 plus trunk group 2 Dial the number To place a call over a...

Page 193: ...till has access to it All other users are blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call The trunk however can still be answered by any user programmed with the trunk access To Remove a Trunk from a Busied Out State 1 Press Speaker key dial 645 Trunk Number 001 128 0 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 179 C ...

Page 194: ...termines if the system should route over the trunk group settings defined in PRG 21 02 or play an error tone When using ARS Class of Service with PRG 26 01 03 set to 1 Play Warning Tone any trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward Off Premise will not complete For a virtual to Call Forward Off Premise PRG 26 01 03 must be set to Route to trunk group and the call will follow t...

Page 195: ...strator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer 0 Off 1 On COS1 14 COS15 0 20 07 06 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Charging Cost Display 0 Off 1 On COS1 14 COS15 0 1 20 07 10 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Programmable Function Key Programming Ap pearance Level 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 07 11 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Forced Trunk Disconnect...

Page 196: ...On COS 01 15 1 20 08 03 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service System Speed Dialing 0 Off Deny 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 08 04 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Group Speed Dialing 0 Off Deny 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 08 05 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Dial Number Preview Preset Dial 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 08 06 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Toll Rest...

Page 197: ...lass of Service Options Incoming Call Service Sub Address Identification 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 09 04 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Notification for Incoming Call List Existence 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 09 06 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Incoming Time Display 0 Of...

Page 198: ...splay 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 11 09 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Group Hold Initiate 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 11 10 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Group Hold Answer 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 11 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Automatic On Hook Transfer 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 11 12 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwardi...

Page 199: ...Options Supplementary Serv ice Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 03 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 04 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Call Forward DND Override Bypass Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 13 05 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Intercom Off Hook Signa...

Page 200: ...Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 13 28 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Allow Class of Service to be Changed 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Paging Display 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 13 30 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Background Music 0 Deny us...

Page 201: ...erv ice Call waiting for standard SIP terminal 0 Disable 1 Enable COS 01 15 0 20 13 55 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Intercom Call to Room Monitor 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 14 01 Class of Service Options for DISA E M First Digit Absorption Delete First Digit Dialed 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 14 02 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Trunk Group Routing ARS Access 0 Off 1 On COS ...

Page 202: ... MODE3 nn Press Hold key to leave the current value unchanged 6 Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold key You see MODE4 nn Press Hold key to leave the current value unchanged 7 Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold key You see MODE5 nn Press Hold key to leave the current value unch...

Page 203: ...nn Press Hold key to leave the current value unchanged 11 Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold key You see Enter Station 12 Go to step 3 and enter another extension number OR Press Speaker key to hang up ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 189 C ...

Page 204: ...e programmed to automatically adjust the system clock on a nightly basis This feature allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose or gain time Conditions The system retains the Clock Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset Changing the time may change the current Class of Service COS service depending on the COS mode setup You can program the system to au...

Page 205: ...9 Time and Date Time Zone Refer to Programming Manual 309 20 02 07 System Options for Multiline Telephones Time and Date Display Mode 4 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 07 03 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Time Setting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 Operation The date must be set in syst...

Page 206: ...es in each table Each code is four digits maximum using 0 9 and Flash key as a wild card Common Restrict Code Table The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Code Restriction Classes Be sure you do not allow the codes you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table The system provides 10 tables with 10 entries in each table Each...

Page 207: ...Counting With Code Call Digit Counting you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can dial This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial up services You can make four entries 4 30 digits Toll Free Trunks Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted such as the company president s Private Line Users can place calls on Code Free Trunks anytime to anywh...

Page 208: ...ion for Trunks Seized Trunk Basis Setting Restriction Class 1 15 Toll Class 1 15 1 15 02 30 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Toll Re striction Class 0 Virtual Extension Follows virtual extension Toll Class in PRG 21 04 1 Real Extension Follows physical stations Toll Class in PRG 21 04 1 21 05 01 Toll Restriction Class International Call Restric tion Table 0 Unassign No international restrict t...

Page 209: ... 09 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Common Speed Dials 0 Does Not Restrict 1 Following Restriction Check 0 21 05 10 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Group Speed Dials 0 Does Not Restrict 1 Following Restriction Check 0 21 05 11 Toll Restriction Class Intercom Call Restriction 0 Disable ICM call not restric ted 1 Enable ICM call restricted 0 21 05 12 Toll Restriction Class PBX Call Res...

Page 210: ...Restricted Call 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 Operation To place a trunk call if your system is Code Restricted 1 Place call normally If your Code Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial your call is cut off SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 196 Code Restriction Toll Restriction C ...

Page 211: ...rides all Code Restriction programming Walking Code Restriction allows you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user When a call is placed using Walking Code Restriction the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in PRG 21 05 xx and PRG 21 06 xx Conditions Off Premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines In the Class heading i...

Page 212: ...ot Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 05 SMDR Output Options Summary Weekly 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 06 SMDR Output Options Summary Monthly 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 07 SMDR Output Options Toll Charge Cost 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 08 SMDR Output Options Incoming Call 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 09 SMDR Output Options Extension Number or Name 0 Name 1 Number 1 35 ...

Page 213: ... Use PRG 21 01 07 to determine how long the system should remove Toll Restriction from the extension In PRG 21 14 02 for each table assign the Toll Restriction Class of Service to be used when a user dials the 6 digit ID assigned in PRG 21 14 01 This entry should provide greater access than the level defined in PRG 21 04 01 The Toll Restriction Class of Service used is the same as those used by PR...

Page 214: ...try In PRG 21 07 01 for each extension number set the 4 digit password a user dials to override the Toll Restriction In PRG 21 01 07 determine how long the system should remove Toll Restriction from the extension Figure 1 5 Temporary Code Restriction Override Operation To temporarily override a restricted extension Code Restriction You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1 At the ...

Page 215: ...level at an extension You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 663 and dial the 6 digit Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service code After dialing the service code the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered As the last digit is entered the display is cleare...

Page 216: ...d Class of Service control the supervisor is not an assigned extension If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Conditions If the system is reset by a first initialize the Dial Block feature is cleared This feature is not available for ISDN S Bus extensions Both PRG 21 09 01 Code Restrict Class and PRG 21 10 Dial Bl...

Page 217: ...15 21 09 02 Dial Block Setup Supervisor Password 0 9 4 digit fixed No Setting 21 10 01 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension Toll Restriction Class 0 1 15 0 No Setting 0 90 19 01 Dial Block Release Delete IP Telephone Release Dial 1 press Hold Press Hold only to cancel Operation To set Dial Block 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 D...

Page 218: ... is heard 6 Press Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up To release Dial Block from another extension 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 601 3 Dial the 4 digit Supervisor Dial Block code 4 Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block 5 Dial 0 Confirmation tone is heard 6 Press Speaker key or replace the handset to...

Page 219: ...ency It also allows a co worker to leave a conference and then rejoin the telephone meeting when it is convenient to do so If a user s extension has Barge In monitor enabled PRG 20 13 10 they can Silent Monitor a conference already in progress A Class of Service option is available which allows or denies an extension user from automatically setting up a Conference Tandem Trunking call upon hanging...

Page 220: ...king Talking Talking STD SIP Talking IP7 8IPLD C1 TEL IP7 8IPLD C1 TEL IP7 8IPLD C1 TEL IP7 8IPLD C1 TEL Press Conference Key Figure 1 6 Standard SIP Conference PRG 20 13 08 must be enabled for the Class of Service the Standard SIP Terminal is in A DSP Resource is required to be assigned for each Standard SIP Phone or IP7 8IPLD C1 TEL that is a part of the conference Member 1 Member 2 Member 3 Nec...

Page 221: ...rvice Code Setup Barge In 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 14 01 04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls 1 63 15 5 dB 15 5 dB in 0 5 dB intervals 32 0 dB 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice f...

Page 222: ...Park orbit To get the outside call you can either press a line key or press Speaker key and dial 0 the Trunk Access Code the trunk number default 0 You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference 4 When called party answers press Conf softkey or Conf key IP7WW 12 24TXH B1 IP7 8IPLD C1 TEL twice If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference you have exceeded th...

Page 223: ... alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference Hookflash twice to set up the Conference again To drop an outside call from the Conference 1 Press Hold key to place the conference call on hold 2 Hang up The lines involved in the Conference ring back separately to the telephone 3 Answer and disconnect the unwanted outside call 4 To re establish the Conference answer the remaining call by...

Page 224: ...nce an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference depending on system programming and all display Multiline Terminals show the joined party If a Conference is not possible the extension user hears a warning tone the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group OR The following steps are not available for DISA 1 Dial the extension number of the internal party 2 Dial the single digi...

Page 225: ...g line Key or hang up and the call recalls the extension When the call is transferred into the Conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the conference depending on the entries in PRG 20 13 17 and PRG 80 01 and all display Multiline Terminals show the joined party To cancel the transfer press the flashing line Key to retrieve the call 4 Hang up ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifica...

Page 226: ...rd protected so that any user joining the conference would be required to enter a password before being connected One terminal or trunk needs one conference channel to participate in the conference The conference call cannot be split over the CPU s two conference blocks limiting the number of conference participants to 16 Conditions Networking calls cannot be transfered to remote Conference Remote...

Page 227: ...og Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone Detection 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 15 02 06 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Hold Key Operating Mode 0 Normal Common 1 Exclusive Hold 2 Park Hold 0 20 11 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Automatic On Hook Transfer 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 11 31 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer to Remote Conference 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 ...

Page 228: ...ve call press the Transfer key 2 Dial the Conference Pilot number Program 11 19 01 then hang up The caller is prompted to enter the conference password PRG 20 11 11 must be enabled for Automatic On Hook Transfer OR 1 With an active call press the Hold key Both Normal Hold and Exclusive Hold are supported as per PRG 15 02 06 OR With an active call press the Hold key and Dial Group Hold service code...

Page 229: ...Operator hears busy tone 20 13 46 ON 20 11 31 OFF After Calling to Remote Conference Op erator hears VRS message After Calling to Remote Conference Op erator hears VRS message 20 13 46 OFF 20 11 31 ON After Calling to Remote Conference Op erator hears Warning Tone After Calling to Remote Conference Op erator hears Warning Tone 20 13 46 OFF 20 11 31 OFF After Calling to Remote Conference Op erator ...

Page 230: ...assigned for one additional participant up to the maximum of 16 to account for the conference circuit needed for recording Conference recordings will follow the notification and Email forwarding setting of the destination mailbox Conference recordings cannot be stored in an InMail Group Mailbox Recorded conference can be downloaded or deleted from the system using the User Pro login for the mailbo...

Page 231: ...ble 0 20 34 09 Remote Conference Group Setup Conference Group Setup Destination Mail Box Enter mailbox number 1 128 No Setting 47 01 03 InMail System Options Incoming Message Length 1 4095 seconds 120 seconds Operation Manual Recording a Remote Conference Call 1 From a multiline terminal press the line key assigned as the conference record key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 10 2 Prompt stating recordi...

Page 232: ...on private mode to the private mode If the outside call is on a line key the user just presses the line key to switch from non private mode to private mode For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option trunks initially have the privacy released The remainder of the call is private If the call is on a Loop Key the user presses their Meet Me Conference function key instead Unlike pressing the lin...

Page 233: ...ervice Options Supplementary Serv ice Barge in Tone Display Intrusion Tone 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 31 01 04 System Options for Internal External Paging Privacy Release Time 0 64800 seconds 90 seconds Operation To join a Voice Call Conference if invited 1 After Conference request press indicated line key A Conf indication is displayed on both telephones A trunk with privacy release or Voice Call Con...

Page 234: ...gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking an outside Automated Attendant bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers OCCs After the outside service answers the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow Without Continued Dialing the system Toll Restriction cuts off the call after a specific number of dialed digits See Programming below for additional informatio...

Page 235: ... Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Restric tion Class 1 15 Toll Class 1 15 2 21 05 04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of Dig its Table Assignment 0 No Table Applied 1 4 Tables 1 4 Defined in PRG 21 06 03 Class No1 2 6 15 0 Class No3 1 Class No4 2 Class No5 3 21 06 03 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Maximum Number of Digits...

Page 236: ...ation from Barge in even when Barge In is allowed in Class of Service When any Multiline Terminal or Single Line Terminal calls a station with Data Line Security a constant busy tone is heard Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 15 02 12 Multiline Tel...

Page 237: ...ce Options Supplementary Serv ice Intercom Off Hook Signaling 0 Off ICM off hook signaling disabled 1 On ICM off hook signaling enabled COS 01 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Block Camp On 0 Off Camp On blocked 1 On Cam...

Page 238: ... extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset depending on programming Terminals must have CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the telephone Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Central Office Calls Answering Secondary Incoming Extension Virtual Extensions Video ...

Page 239: ...n Ring Assignment Ringing 0 No Ringing 1 Ring 0 15 11 01 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Ringing 0 Immediate Ring 1 Delayed Ring 0 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions Call Coverage Delay Interval 0 64800 seconds 10 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No An swer Recall Time 0 64800 seconds 0 No Overflow 0 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Trunk Service Type 0 Normal...

Page 240: ...p to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key will ring 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold key for a second time for Delayed Ring or skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key will delay ring 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker key SL2100 ISSUE ...

Page 241: ...1 26 cancel When this feature is activated any DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number go immediately to the transfer destination and do not ring anyone in the group To set up the destination you use PRG 24 05 and PRG 13 04 Once these programs are set the access code assigned in PRG 11 11 27 can be used to change the destination as needed Delay This feature can be enabled or disabled by usi...

Page 242: ...n a line becomes free The VRS can also transfer calls to Department Groups Refer to Voice Response System VRS on page 1 910 for information on setting up the VRS The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is Busy on a call In Do Not Disturb Call Forwarded Logged Out Conditions When a DIL rings to a Department Group the DIL may follow overflow programming PRG 22 01 04 and PRG...

Page 243: ... All Ring Mode Operation does not work to a Secondary Department Group Default Settings Disabled Priority Routing CALL IF IF IF Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Figure 1 7 Department Calling Priority Call Routing ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual...

Page 244: ... Routing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 Figure 1 8 Department Calling Circular Routing System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s VRS for Messaging SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 230 Department Calling D ...

Page 245: ...ment Routing when Busy Auto Step Call 0 Normal Intercom caller hears busy tone 1 Circular Intercom caller routes to an idle group member 0 16 01 04 Department Group Basic Data Setup Hunting Mode 0 Stop at last member non loop 1 Circular 0 16 01 05 Department Group Basic Data Setup Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation 0 Manual Ring the extensions one at a time when the service code are pressed 1...

Page 246: ... No Setting 11 11 25 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 602 11 11 26 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Exten sion Group 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 603 11 11 27 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Exten sion Group 0 9 Maxi...

Page 247: ...tment Groups Priority 0 999 Priority 0 999 0 Operation To call a department group 1 Go off hook 2 Dial department extension number The system routes the call to the first free telephone in the department group 3 Optional To manually ring all members of the group dial the single digit service code assigned for All Member Ring PRG 11 16 10 To log out of your Department Calling Group While you are lo...

Page 248: ... The key goes out when you log back in To change the Department Group Overflow Destination 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 604 Department Group 01 50 3 Dial 01 08 Refer to PRG 24 05 4 Dial the destination the calls route to 5 Press Hold key SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 234 Department Calling D ...

Page 249: ... for Department Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In PRG 20 08 12 enable 1 or disable 0 an extension ability to use Department Step Calling When using department group step calling and ecology mode there must be at least two terminals functioning for the step call feature to work Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Depar...

Page 250: ...r Extension are Class 1 20 08 12 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Department Group Step Calling 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 Operation To make a Step Call 1 Place a call to a busy Department Group member OR Place a call to a Department Group pilot number 2 Dial Department Step Code 2 to call the next available Department Group member 3 Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members Y...

Page 251: ... address based on the systems MAC Address DHCP client can set following programs automatically however other IP related programs such as PRG 84 26 have to set manually as required IP Addresses PRG 10 12 01 CPU Subnet Masks PRG 10 12 02 CPU Default Gateway PRG 10 12 03 DHCP Client PRG 10 63 and existing DHCP Server feature PRG 10 13 can not be used at the same time Default Settings Disabled System ...

Page 252: ...work Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 CPU Network Setup IP Address VoIPDB 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask VoIPDB 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 22...

Page 253: ... Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode but only for internal calls The tone is still heard for external dialing Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 11 ...

Page 254: ...Operation To enable disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial 724 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 240 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone D ...

Page 255: ...omatically using a feature like Last Number Redial the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group Refer to the chart under Programming for more information Conditions None Default Settings Disabled for manually dialed calls enabled for automatically dialed calls System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Dialin...

Page 256: ... for Outgoing Calls Dial Tone Detection 0 64800 seconds 5 21 01 05 System Options for Outgoing Calls Disconnect Time when Dial Tone not Detected 0 64800 seconds 3 21 01 06 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial Pause at First Digit 0 64800 seconds 1 Table 1 8 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction Method 14 02 05 14 02 11 Result if dial tone not present Press a line key or Dial 0 Trunk number 0 0...

Page 257: ...ey Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Display Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Voice Response System VRS Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 ...

Page 258: ...ss Hold key To use Dial Number Preview to place a call by Directory Dialing Multiline Terminal only When set PRG 15 02 60 1 or 2 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 To preview any number dial the number you wish to call OR To preview a Speed Dial System Group number 1 Press Down Cursor key and press 1st character you want to search 2 Press Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to select th...

Page 259: ...s and are supplied to the PLO The PLO synchronization source priorities are as follows 1 1PRIDB C1 2 2BRIDB C1 3 IP7 CPU C1 Conditions If multiple PRIs exist the system chooses the first one that synchronized with the carrier If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down the system begins to count forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI If multiple B...

Page 260: ...ed with the carrier In this example the BRI in slot02 synchronized with the carrier first and became the PLO synchronization source 082U 1PRIDB PRI 082U 2BRIDB BRI Main Chassis Figure 1 10 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2 In this scenario the PRI was the clocking source until it went down There are no other BRIs in the system The CPU now becomes the PLO synchronization source 082U 1PRIDB PRI CPU M...

Page 261: ... can optionally distribute the 1000 entries among the 20 tables In addition to number conversion each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it When the DID call rings the destination extension the programmed name displays Flexible DID Service Compatibility With three digit service the Telco sends three digits to the system for translation Be sure to program your system for compat...

Page 262: ...er Intercept can reroute the call to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail Without Vacant Number Intercept the caller hears error tone after misdialing Busy Intercept Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension If Busy Intercept is enabled the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail If B...

Page 263: ...by a busy intercept the Voice Mail protocol forwards busy calls When the incoming call is routed to the first destination by a ring no answer intercept the protocol forwards ring no answer The Voice Mail transfers the calls to the mailbox number defined in PRG 22 11 02 Any valid DID number must be entered in the DID table PRG 22 11 or PRG 22 17 01 If a valid DID number is not entered there is no r...

Page 264: ...2 PRG 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22 11 1 500 1111 1 00 00 09 00 1 2 09 00 12 00 2 3 12 00 13 00 3 4 13 00 18 00 2 5 18 00 00 00 1 6 00 00 00 00 0 7 00 00 00 00 0 8 00 00 00 00 0 Table 1 9 Example 2 Manual Change PRG 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22 11 1 500 1111 1 00 00 00 00 1 2 00 00 00 00 2 3 00 00 00 00 3 4 00 00 00 00 0 ...

Page 265: ... Example 0 00 0 00 8 00 17 00 Time Pattern PRG 22 17 PRG 22 11 01 PRG 22 11 02 1 4 300 Incoming 2 1 101 Incoming 3 4 300 Incoming Monday Friday PRG 22 17 05 1 On 0 00 0 00 9 00 15 00 13 00 Time Pattern PRG 22 17 PRG 22 11 01 PRG 22 11 02 1 4 300 Incoming 2 2 102 Incoming 3 3 103 Incoming 4 4 300 Incoming Saturday PRG 22 17 05 1 On 0 00 0 00 Time Pattern PRG 22 17 PRG 22 11 01 PRG 22 11 02 1 4 300 ...

Page 266: ...her types of trunks may use the DID table but the DID intercept feature for each DID number is not yet supported When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy or DND the reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension when the call is ringing to their telephone Direct Inward Lines DILs also provide a way for outside callers to dial a syste...

Page 267: ...sy call queuing must be turned off for it to work Default Settings Disabled Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Off Hook Signaling Paging External Programmable Function Keys Station Message Detail Recording Transfer Guide to Feature Programming The programs listed below indicate the most commonly used programs required for this fe...

Page 268: ...er to the Program ming Manual 22 11 03 DID Translation Table DID Name Maximum 12 characters No Setting 22 11 04 DID Translation Table Transfer Operation Mode 0 No Transfer 1 Busy 2 No Answer 3 Busy No Answer 0 22 11 05 DID Translation Table Transfer Destination Number 1 0 No setting 01 50 Incoming Ring Group 102 VM 201 250 Department Group 400 VRS 401 DISA 501 599 DISA VRS Message 1000 1999 Common...

Page 269: ...le Area Setup for Time Pattern Received Dial Up to eight digits No Setting 22 17 04 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Dial In Conversion Table Number 1 1000 These are the table entries in PRG 22 11 0 22 11 01 DID Translation Table Received Number Maximum eight digits 0 9 Refer to the Program ming Manual 22 11 02 DID Translation Table Target Number Maximum 36 digits 0 9 Refer to ...

Page 270: ...efault values 22 17 01 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Received Dial Up to eight digits No Setting 22 17 02 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Start of Time 0000 2359 Time 0000 22 17 03 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern End of Time 0000 2359 Time 0000 22 17 04 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Dial In Conversion Table Num...

Page 271: ...Telephone Set 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 25 07 05 System Timers for VRS DISA Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic Answering Tel ephone Set 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 25 07 11 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Answer Delay Time 0 64800 seconds 0 second 25 07 13 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Busy Tone Interval 0 64800 seconds 5 seconds 25 07 14 System Timers for VRS DISA Delayed V...

Page 272: ...grammable Function key PRG 15 07 01 88 or SC 751 Key Code 88 3 Dial 1 500 table number 4 Dial the Time Pattern 1 8 Table 1 13 LED Flash Patterns Time Pattern LED Appearance Pattern 1 Off Pattern 2 On Pattern 3 Slow Flash Pattern 4 Fast Flash Patterns 5 8 Off SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 258 Direct Inward Dialing DID D ...

Page 273: ...to the Ring Group assignments in PRG 22 04 and PRG 22 05 3 If none of the destinations in steps 1 2 above are available the call continues to ring until a destination becomes free The DIL follows call forwarding programming even to voice mail When a call is transferred by Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy or DND the Reason for Transfer can display at the transferred extension You can ...

Page 274: ...mmonly used programs required for this feature The programs are listed in the order that the installer should follow Refer to the PCPro wizards for further detailed programming When a is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Trunk Ser...

Page 275: ...erv ice Display the Reason for Transfer 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Extension Number Maximum eight Digits Group01 has 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 and 108 First 8 ports ringing Operation To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the flashing line key for DIL on the Multiline Terminal Pressing the flashing line key puts the fi...

Page 276: ... the password entered with a specific user number which in turn has a Class of Service If the Class of Service allows the action such as making outgoing trunk calls the call goes through If the DISA Class of Service does not allow the action the system prevents the call The DISA Class of Service options are Trunk Group Routing ARS Access When a DISA caller dials into the system they may be able to...

Page 277: ...lly play the voice prompt Please hold on All lines are busy Your call will be answered when a line becomes free while the caller waits The interval between the voice prompts is the VRS Waiting Message Interval Time When an extension in the Department Group becomes available the call automatically goes through If the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time the DISA call r...

Page 278: ...t be programmed the same In a system with ARS enabled When a DISA caller dials 0 for an outside call if allowed the system routes the call via ARS In a system with ARS disabled When a DISA caller dials 0 for an outside call if allowed the system uses the routes programmed for Trunk Group Routing Transferred calls on DISA DID DIL ISDN trunks or from the VRS can display the reason a call is being tr...

Page 279: ...dB 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Trans fer 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 20 01 05 System Options DTMF Receive Active Time 0 64800 seconds 10 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override 0 Off 2nd...

Page 280: ... 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Trunk Service Type 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 Tie Line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Extension Number Maximum eight Digits Group01 has 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 and 108 First 8 ports ringing 25 01 01 VRS DISA Line Basic Data Setup VRS DISA Dial In Mo...

Page 281: ... 64800 seconds 60 seconds 25 07 04 System Timers for VRS DISA Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 25 07 05 System Timers for VRS DISA Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic Answering Tel ephone Set 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversa tion Warning Tone Time 0 64800 seconds 1800 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS ...

Page 282: ...etting 20 28 03 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Continue Time 0 64800 seconds 0 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone 0 64800 seconds 1800 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk 0 64800 seconds 0 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversa tion Warning Tone Time 0 64800 seconds 1800 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DI...

Page 283: ... 01 through PRG 11 11 05 6 Dial the number of the extension to be forwarded 7 Dial 1 to set Call Forwarding or 0 to cancel Call Forwarding 8 Dial the extension number to which the calls will be forwarded To use the Continue code to extend a DISA call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time PRG 25 07...

Page 284: ...le on One Touch and Programmable Feature Keys The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the Service Code For example if they are Trunk Group 1 9 then storing 70401 under a DSS Console Key access Trunk Group 1 when the console user presses the key The maximum number of consoles allowed per system is 12 Up to 12 consoles can be connected to the terminal DSS Lamp Ta...

Page 285: ...f many of the Programmable Function keys The stored service code can have up to three digits but it can have additional option codes added e g to set Immediate Call Forward for all calls Trunk Group 02 and Virtual Extension 03 codes can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the additional data required The capacity of a console can be expanded by assigning a Page...

Page 286: ...t Data Default 10 03 01 ETU Setup ETU Setup 082U B1 Terminal Type B1 HBI PKG 0 No Setting 1 Multi Line Telephone 2 SLT 8 Door Phone 10 DSS Console 3 7 9 11 12 Not Used ESIU PKG 0 No Setting 1 Multi Line Telephone 10 DSS Console Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 15 02 08 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automat ic Handsfree 0 Preselect 1 One Touch Automatic Handsfree 1 20 ...

Page 287: ...p Table Out of Schedule ACD DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 0 30 05 06 DSS Console Lamp Table ACD Agent log Out ACD DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 5 30 05 07 DSS Console Lamp Table ACD Agent Log In ACD DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 4 30 05 09 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 1 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 7 30 05 10 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 2 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 1 30 05 11 ...

Page 288: ...ree you must lift the handset to speak Extension Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is On Off Flashing Fast The assigned extension is Busy on a call Idle In Do Not Disturb Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console 1 Press the flashing DSS Console key assigned to the trunk If you do not have Handsfree you must lift the handset to speak Transferring a call using your DSS Console Needs to set at 30 ...

Page 289: ...nal Page zone is Busy Idle Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console Needs to set at 30 03 1 Press the Night Service key Night Service Busy Lamp Field When this key is ON DAY NIGHT BREAK NIGHT 2 The system is in the Day 1 Mode Night 1 Mode Break 1 Mode Night 2 Mode Using a DSS Console key as a One Touch or Programmable Function key A user can have DSS Console keys programmed as One To...

Page 290: ...and voice announced Intercom calls Conditions Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using Directed Call Pickup Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Directed Call Pickup cannot be used to pick up a call ringing at an ACD agent Default Settings Enabled System Availability Te...

Page 291: ...de Setup for Service Access Direct Extension Call Pickup 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 11 12 30 Service Code Setup for Service Access Speci fied Trunk Answer 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 672 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 10 05 Class of Service Options Answer Service Di rected Call Pickup for Own Group ...

Page 292: ... up or reboots The system resorts extension names when You change PRG 15 01 01 Extension Numbers and Names Any user dials 700 and changes their extension name Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Speed Dial System Group Station Intercom Calling and One Touch Calling Extension Directory only shows a telephones VEs that are connected and have a name assigned in PRG...

Page 293: ...ng follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled For example if your extension cannot normally use Speed Dial System Group Station Directory Dialing can not access it either 3 Dial letter number range for the party you want to call e g dial 2 for A B C or 2 You can enter several letters to help narrow the search Press to enter additional letters on the same key ex TOM 8666 6 4...

Page 294: ...s Program Description 80 01 01 04 Service Tone Setup Set the frequency of the system splash tone This is the tone the system uses for example to alert the user of an incoming voice announced Intercom call 30 05 02 21 DSS Console Lamp Table Set the DSS and Hotline key flash rates for busy idle DND ACD Agent status and hotel options Conditions Single Line Terminal users cannot listen to or hear the ...

Page 295: ...e mail features require system tones be changed in PRG 80 01 02 to work Refer to the Programming section of the InMail feature for details Call Holding Busy Greeting Call Screening Await Answer Transfer When a ring group call rings a Single Line Station the BLF indication shows busy The priority of the Large LED is as follows 1 CO Call Ringing 2 Message Waiting Received 3 VM Message Waiting 4 Mess...

Page 296: ...l IP Multiline Terminal 2 Medium 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 3 Low 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 4 Melody 1 2W Digital IP Mul tiline Terminal 5 Melody 2 2W Digital IP Mul tiline Terminal 6 Melody 3 2W Digital IP Mul tiline Terminal 7 Melody4 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 Melody5 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 15 02 35 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Cy...

Page 297: ...upplementary Serv ice BLF Indication on CO Incoming State 0 Off Disabled 1 On Enabled COS 01 15 0 20 15 01 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Signal Type Nor mal Incoming Call on Trunk Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 3 20 15 02 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Signal Type PBX CES Incoming Call Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 8 20 15 03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Signal Type In coming Internal Call Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 3 ...

Page 298: ... Time Slot Refer to Programming Manual 80 01 02 06 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot Refer to Programming Manual 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Tone 14 Intercom Ring back Tone 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot Refer to Programming Manual 80 01 02 14 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot Refer to Programming Manual 80 01 02 Se...

Page 299: ...6 0 No Tone 2000ms 32 7 0 No Tone 0ms 8 0 No Tone 0ms Operation To listen to the incoming ring choices 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 711 3 Dial 1 to check ringing for intercom calls OR Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls 4 For Intercom calls select the pitch you want to check 1 8 OR For trunk calls select the pitch 1 8 you want to check 5 Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press...

Page 300: ...5 Press Speaker key to hang up SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 286 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns D ...

Page 301: ... 11 08 Virtual Extension VE do not support DND Programmable Function keys Multiline Terminal users can activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while on a call This option is not available for Single Line Terminals When DND and Call Forward are set on the same telephone call forwarding works If Busy and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations it follows the Busy forwarding If an extension...

Page 302: ...lectable Display Messaging Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 11 08 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Do Not Disturb 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 747 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Forward Do Not Disturb Override 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 707 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup Do Not Dis turb Call Forward override 0 9 Maximum of ...

Page 303: ... All Cfwto Mon 6 Ext Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked ICM Incoming Intercom Paging call forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked ALL All Calls Blocked Cfwto Call Forwards Blocked Mon Room Monitor blocked 7 To Cancel DND 8 Do not lift handset 9 Pressthe Program softkey 10 Press the DND softkey 11 Press the Cncl softkey Multiline Terminal Using Feature Key or Access Code Multiline Terminal have a de...

Page 304: ...Dial 747 3 Dial the DND option code 0 Cancel DND 1 Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked 2 Paging Incoming Intercom Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked 3 All Calls Blocked 4 Call Forwards Blocked SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 290 Do Not Disturb DND D ...

Page 305: ... Door Box Specifications Maximum Output 1 75 V RMS Output Impedance 600 Ohms The system can have up to 6 Door Boxes Six chime tones are available Conditions Digital and IP Terminals will show the Door Box ID Name as assigned in PRG 32 04 01 The Door Box Feature Requires an unused analog extension port 082U B1 Analog Extension Port1 2 fixed on the each board To user Door Box hardware switches on th...

Page 306: ... Ringing Member 1 101 Other No Setting 32 03 01 Door Box Basic Setup Chime Pattern 0 None 1 Door Box Ring 1 2 Door Box Ring 2 3 Door Box Ring 3 4 Door Box Ring 4 5 Door Box Ring 5 6 Door Box Ring 6 Door Box 1 1 Door Box 2 2 Door Box 3 3 Door Box 4 4 Door Box 5 5 Door Box 6 6 32 04 01 Door Box Name Setup Door Box Name Up to 12 characters Door Box Name 1 DOOR 1 Door Box Name 2 DOOR 2 Door Box Name 6...

Page 307: ...2 36 Service Code Setup for Service Access Door Box Access 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 702 32 01 03 Door Box Timers Setup Off Premise Call For ward by Door Box Disconnect Timer 0 64800 seconds 60 seconds 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 15 03 19 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Door Pho...

Page 308: ...ND CONF key or Conf softkey 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal Single Line Terminal If you are busy on a call an off hook signal is heard indicating the incoming Door Box call 1 Press Flash key or hookflash to place your active call on hold 2 Dial the door box access code 702 by default plus the door box number 1 6 to answer the Door Box call To retrieve the original call hang up The original call r...

Page 309: ...nal press Speaker key dial SC 722 OR At the Multiline Terminal only press the External Forward by Doorphone key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 54 OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset dial 722 2 Dial 0 for Cancel ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 295 D ...

Page 310: ...annot be used for internal DID calls Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Flash PBX Compatibility Behind PBX Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 12 42 Service Code Setup for Service Access Flash on Trunk lines 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 3 11 12 59 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Dr...

Page 311: ...s of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 Operation To use the Drop key from a Multiline Terminal with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Press the Function key programmed as a Drop key 2 Receive the new CO PBX dial tone 3 Dial the desired number To use the Drop key feature from a Single Line Terminal with a CO PBX call in ...

Page 312: ... in to right end or middle DND Key No Yes DND key is not used Clear Back Key No Yes Feature key works as Clear Back key when use Directly Dialing function Feature Key Yes No Answer key Yes No Answer key operates like SV9100 Other DT430 terminal options such as bottom option side option or handset option are not supported Navigation key and Center Directory dialing feature of DT430 are not supporte...

Page 313: ...Operation None ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 299 D ...

Page 314: ...ed for the slot until all phones on the package are idle When the system is in power cut mode a user cannot dial an emergency number 911 from the station The station is unusable until it comes out of power cut mode Combination of time schedule and Manual mode change When using department group step calling and ecology mode there must be at least two terminals functioning for the step call feature ...

Page 315: ...power cutting off state continues to next power cutting on time The system does not start the power supply until next schedule Set the cutting telephone power by manual operation Power off state Power on state Time schedule Operation 0 00 6 00 19 00 19 00 0 00 0 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 19 00 19 00 0 00 0 00 6 00 Figure 1 14 Time Schedule 2 During power cutting off state Outgoing calls can not be made In...

Page 316: ... Eco Mode 1 20 02 10 System Options for Multiline Telephones Time Before Shifting to Power Saving Mode 0 No Shift 1 1 minute 2 2 minutes 3 4 minutes 4 8 minutes 5 16 minutes 6 32 minutes 7 64 minutes 0 20 42 01 Night Mode for each package Ecology Mode group No 1 4 1 20 43 01 Power supply for each package Ecology Mode 0 Cut the power 1 Power Supply 1 15 07 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the pr...

Page 317: ...ervice Patterns Night Group Mode Time pattern Set Time No Start End Night Mode 1 1 1 0000 0600 2 1 1 2 0600 1900 1 1 1 3 1900 0000 2 19 00 06 00 Power OFF PKG 2 Chassis Power ON PKG 3 2 F 1 F Figure 1 15 Automatic Night Service To cut the power for package 2 and 3 only on Sunday Program PRG 20 42 01 PKG 2 Night Mode Service Group No 1 PRG 20 42 01 PKG 3 Night Mode Service Group No 1 PRG 20 43 01 P...

Page 318: ...Switching Night Group Mode 1 Sunday Time pattern 2 Monday Time pattern 1 Tuesday Time pattern 1 Wednesday Time pattern 1 Thursday Time pattern 1 Friday Time pattern 1 Saturday Time pattern 1 Power OFF PKG 3 Chassis 2 F 1 F Power OFF PKG 2 Figure 1 16 Weekly Night Service Power Saving Mode Program PRG 15 02 18 TEL 200 1 PRG 20 02 10 1 minute SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 304 Ecology E ...

Page 319: ...1 Idle state at TEL200 2 One minute later LED area highlighted in red becomes dark at TEL200 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 305 E ...

Page 320: ...bled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Drop Key PBX Compatibility Behind PBX InMail Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 12 42 Service Code Setup for Service Access Flash on Trunk lines 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 3 14 02 03 Analog Trunk Data Setup Flash Type 0 Open Loop Flash 1 Ground 0 14 02 04 Analog Trunk Data...

Page 321: ...Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Flash ing 0 No 1 Yes 1 Operation To flash the trunk you are on From a Multiline Terminal 1 Press Flash key From a Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 3 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 307 F ...

Page 322: ... set by Menu Soft Key Dial 43 This night mode follows night mode group Program 12 05 of the terminal Soft Key Menu Index 1 Index 2 Input Data Ring Preferences Intercom Menu 41 Ring Type 1 8 Ring Preferences Line Keys Menu 42 Ring Type 1 8 Ring Preferences Each Line Keys Menu 43 Line Key 001 Trunk Max Night Mode 1 8 Ring Type 1 8 Conditions When the ring tone is changed at the terminal the changed ...

Page 323: ...ng Tone 0 8 0 Trunk incoming ring tone 4W Hybrid Multiline Terminal Trunk incoming ring tone 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 1 High 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 2 Middle 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 3 Low 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 4 Melody1 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 5 Melody2 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melody3 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 7 Melody4 2W Digital...

Page 324: ...d each night mode setting 3 Press the Select softkey 4 Then line number 01 is indicated Dial preferred line number if necessary 5 Press the Select softkey Current set Ring type is indicated at 2nd line of LCD 6 Press the Select softkey Then set ring tone is heard The or the softkey can change ring tone to select 7 Press the Save softkey Incoming ring tone of the trunk was set Then can continue to ...

Page 325: ...de normally 0 This is the code users dial to access Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing 11 20 01 Dial Extension Analyze Table Use tables 01 128 to assign the digits to be dialed using the Dial Extension Analyze Tables These tables are used when PRG 11 01 01 is set to option 9 Dial Extension Analyze Up to 8 digits can be assigned and the valid entries are 0 1 9 11 20 02 Dial Extension ...

Page 326: ...ts table 1 Example for 310X Example for 3100X 10s Group 4 digit 100s Group 5 digit 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 4 9 Dial Extension Analyze Table 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 5 9 Dial Extension Analyze Table 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 310 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 3100 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom Example for 31000X Example for 310000X 1000s Group 6 digit 10 000s Group 7 digit 11 01 01 Dial 3...

Page 327: ...Storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 753 11 10 05 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Storing Group Speed Dialing Numbers 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 754 11 10 06 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Set Trunk to Trunk Transfer per Trunk 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 733 11 10 07 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Cancel Trunk to Trunk Transfer per Trunk 0 9 Maxi...

Page 328: ...fuse 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 748 11 10 35 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Dial In Mode Switching 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 609 11 10 41 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Date Setting 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 789 11 10 42 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Maintenance Service 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 643 11 10 43 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS Incoming 0 9 Ma...

Page 329: ...tion Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 721 11 11 16 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 723 11 11 17 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Programmable Function Key Programming 3 Digit Service Codes 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 751 11 11 18 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation BGM On Off...

Page 330: ...Tandem Ringing 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit No Setting 11 11 42 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Transfer Dial Setting for Out of Range 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 689 11 11 43 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Headset Mode Switching 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 688 11 11 45 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward All Split 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 682 11 11 46 Ser...

Page 331: ... 8 digit 714 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Forward Do Not Disturb Override 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 707 11 12 02 Service Code Setup for Service Access Con ference 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 1 11 12 03 Service Code Setup for Service Access Over ride Off Hook Signaling 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 709 11 12 04 Service Code Setup for Service Access Set Camp On 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 750 11 ...

Page 332: ... Service Access Call Pickup 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 11 12 28 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Another Group 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 769 11 12 29 Service Code Setup for Service Access Direct Extension Call Pickup 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 11 12 30 Service Code Setup for Service Access Speci fied Trunk Answer 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 672 11 12 31 Service Code Setup for Service Access P...

Page 333: ...t 624 11 12 59 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Drop Operation for SLT 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 660 11 12 62 Service Code Setup for Service Access Secur ity Sensor Reset 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 716 11 12 63 Service Code Setup for Service Access Watch Mode Start 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 717 11 12 64 Service Code Setup for Service Access Secur ity Sensor Mode Start 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 719 1...

Page 334: ...digit 637 11 14 12 Service Code Setup for Hotel Check In 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 638 11 14 13 Service Code Setup for Hotel Check Out 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 639 11 14 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Change for Own Extension 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 640 11 14 15 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Change for Other Extension 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 641 11 14 16 Service Code Setup for Hot...

Page 335: ...m of 1 digit No Setting 11 16 08 Single Digit Service Code Setup Voice Over 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit 6 11 16 09 Single Digit Service Code Setup Access to Voice Mail 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit 8 11 16 10 Single Digit Service Code Setup Department Group 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 11 16 11 Single Digit Service Code Setup Station Park Hold 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 11 20 01 Dial Extension Ana...

Page 336: ...acing CO calls users must dial each digit in this time Station Timer Class is referred by stations Trunk Timer Class is referred by DID Automatic An swer Trunk trunks 21 01 09 20 31 06 Hotline Time Start Time A Ringdown extension automatically calls its pro grammed destination after this time Station Timer Class is referred by the stations which sets Hotline 22 01 03 20 31 07 Ring No Answer Alarm ...

Page 337: ... Time Determine the time trunk to trunk conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 08 20 31 20 Long Conversation Disconnect Time This timer determines how long the system waits be fore disconnecting a trunk to trunk conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 09 20 31 21 DISA Internal Pagi...

Page 338: ...om I D Timer 0 64800 seconds 10 20 31 05 Timer Class Timer Assignment Trunk Interdi gits Time Trunk I D Timer 0 64800 seconds 10 20 31 06 Timer Class Timer Assignment Hotline Time Start Time Hotline Start 0 64800 seconds 0 20 31 07 Timer Class Timer Assignment Ring No Answer Alarm Time 0 64800 seconds 60 20 31 08 Timer Class Timer Assignment DIL Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time 0 64800 seconds 0...

Page 339: ... 60 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No An swer Recall Time 0 64800 seconds 0 No Overflow 0 22 01 06 System Options for Incoming Calls DID Ring No Answer Time 0 64800 seconds 20 24 01 01 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds 90 24 01 02 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Callback Time 0 64800 seconds 0 24 01 03 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0 ...

Page 340: ...Input Data Default 31 01 02 System Options for Internal External Paging Page Announcement Duration 0 64800 seconds 1200 seconds Operation Please refer to the feature for the operation SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 326 Flexible Timeouts F ...

Page 341: ... and when no other lines are available Conditions This feature only works on an analog trunk ISDN and IP trunks do not have the Forced Trunk Disconnect available Default Settings COS 01 15 Enable System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s Analog Trunks Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 10 2...

Page 342: ... system disconnects the trunk You can now place a call on the free trunk 3 Press the line key for the trunk disconnected in step 2 OR Dial the trunk access code 0 trunk number for the trunk disconnected in step 2 Single Line Terminal 1 Dial trunk access code 0 trunk number You hear busy tone Trunk numbers are 001 128 2 Dial Service Code PRG 11 10 26 You hear confirmation beeps as the system discon...

Page 343: ...up group when the user does not know the group number There are 50 Call Pickup Groups available Conditions A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name Group Call Pickup can be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park Group Call Pickup cannot be used to answer calls ringing Call Arrival Keys or Virtual Extensions Virtual Extensions can use Group Call Pickup to answer calls ringing a ...

Page 344: ...ckup Another Group 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 10 03 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup for Specific Group 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 10 04 Class of Service Options Answer Service Tel ephone Call Pickup 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 10 05 Class of Service Options Answer Service Di rected Call Pickup for Own Group 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 10 09 Class of Service Options Answer Servi...

Page 345: ...call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker key 2 At Multiline Terminal only press the Group Call Pickup key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 26 group OR Dial 768 and the group number 1 50 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 331 G ...

Page 346: ...n extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen Group Listen is not available to Single Line Terminals Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Digital Multiline Terminal Required Component s None Related Features Handset Operation Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions...

Page 347: ...s hear your caller s voice over your telephone speaker after pressing Speaker key To talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen 1 Hang up the handset To cancel Group Listen without hanging up your call 1 Do not hang up 2 Press the flashing Speaker key You can talk to the caller over the handset Your co workers can no longer hear the caller s voice ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Man...

Page 348: ...transmit Mute is canceled temporary and back to original Mute state when On Hook At PRG 15 02 50 MIC Lamp Status Change Mute key LED can be set either way Default is LED On when Mute On Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Defa...

Page 349: ... the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0 33 0 No Tone 33 De fault Time Slot Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values Operation While talking on a terminal handset 1 Press Mute key ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 335 H ...

Page 350: ... calls or for both outgoing calls and incoming calls Monitor User can place a call without lifting the handset but must lift the handset to speak Conditions Handsfree and Monitor are not available for Single Line Terminals Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and outgoing calls are handled and thus determines what happens when the user presses Speaker key Monitoring volume may be adjusted usi...

Page 351: ...are Class 1 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 Operation To talk Handsfree 1 Press Speaker the Trunk Line or the Virtual Extension key 2 Place the call 3 Speak toward the telephone when the called party answers To change a handset call into a Handsfree call 1 Press Speaker key and hang up the handset 2 Press Speaker key again to hang up...

Page 352: ...one instead of the handset With Microphone Cutoff enabled Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep instead of two Incoming Intercom calls always ring Single Line Terminals The extension you are calling must be set to Voice for this feature to work Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Handsfr...

Page 353: ...08 10 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Signal Voice Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 Operation To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle Speaker key 2 Dial 721 3 Press Speaker key to hang up This disables Forced Intercom Ringing To enable Forced Intercom Ring...

Page 354: ...the headset the Headset function key becomes a release disconnect key and no dial tone is heard from the speaker While in the headset mode the hook switch is not functional An extension with a headset can still receive voice announced Intercom calls and respond handsfree when idle A Headset Function key is required to answer or place a call in headset mode Electronic Hook Switch EHS functionality ...

Page 355: ...gnaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 Operation To enable the headset 1 Plug in the headset into the headset jack on the bottom of the telephone 2 Program a Headset key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 05 You hear a confirmation beep To use the headset The Headset key lights when on a call To disconnect press the Headset key again You can still use the handset for calls or re...

Page 356: ...tercom call on Hold The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension Hold Recall to Operator Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that are left on hold too long With Hold Recall to Operator A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Time The recalling trunk rings the extension that placed it on Hold for ...

Page 357: ...Map Setup Access Map 0 No access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and outgoing ac cess 7 Full access Access Map 1 128 Trunk Ports 1 128 as signed with option 7 ac cess incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 02 06 Multiline Telep...

Page 358: ...or Transfer After Hold Callback 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension Num ber Up to eight digits 101 24 01 01 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds 90 24 01 02 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Callback Time 0 64800 seconds 0 24 01 03 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds 90 24 01 04 System Options for Hold Exclusi...

Page 359: ...Speaker key to hang up Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 732 3 Hang up To pick up a call on Group Hold 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 762 Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 762 Intercom Hold To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press Hold key 2 Press Speaker key to hang up To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press the flashing Hold key ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and...

Page 360: ...e Mail so your guests can leave requests even when your service providers are unavailable A Department Calling Group allowing for example your guests to reach the first available agent in your reservation desk group A Department Calling Group A Department Calling Group allowing for example your guests to reach the first available agent in your reservation desk group Message Waiting If you call a g...

Page 361: ...e touch room monitoring abilities Press a button on your DSS Console to check a room status Or see at a glance which rooms have Wake Up Calls set or messages waiting You can also use your console for business mode features Do Not Disturb A guest can activate DND anytime they need privacy for example if they need to work uninterrupted Do Not Disturb DND blocks the room telephone incoming calls and ...

Page 362: ...t handset 639 Exten sion of the room you want to check out Hang up House Cleaning Options Set a room house cleaning status from the room telephone Lift handset 640 Room status code 1 4 Hang up 1 Room Clean Occupied 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required Set a room status from another telephone Lift handset 641 Extension of the room you want to set Room sta tus code 1 4 Hang up 1 Room...

Page 363: ...nnot be seen when the console is in Wake Up Call or Room Status mode The BLF indication for each room is always available no matter what mode the console is in The Hotel Motel feature is licensed The following dial access codes can be used only if the CPU is licensed for the Hotel Motel Feature Dial Access Codes that Require SL2100 HOTEL LIC Program Dial Access Code Description 11 10 16 626 Leavin...

Page 364: ...ternal Equipment TCP Port Available values are 0 65535 External Device 1 CTI Server 0 External Device 2 ACD MIS 0 External Device 4 Net working System 30000 External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 8 UC Web Application 0 External Device 9 1st Party CTI 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data ...

Page 365: ...Other Extension 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 637 11 14 12 Service Code Setup for Hotel Check In 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 638 11 14 13 Service Code Setup for Hotel Check Out 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 639 11 14 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Change for Own Extension 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 640 11 14 15 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Change for Other Extension 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 641 11...

Page 366: ...11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Mandarin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian 3 42 01 01 System Options for Hotel Motel Answering Message Mode for Wake Up Call Hotel Mode 0 MOH Hold Time 1 VAU Message 2 VAU Message Time 0 42 01 02 System Options for ...

Page 367: ...striction 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 03 09 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel DND Setting for Own Extension 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 03 10 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 03 11 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Change Room Status for Own Extension 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 03 12 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel ...

Page 368: ...tivate and cancel Do Not Disturb for room telephones If you allow room telephones to activate DND you should also allow supervisor stations to remotely activate and cancel Checking out a guest also deactivates their phone Do Not Disturb Conditions None Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Refer to Hotel Motel Required Component s Refer to Hotel Motel Related Features Hotel Motel...

Page 369: ...l Motel DND Setting for Own Extension 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 Setting Up Operation To Enable DND at a room telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 627 You hear confirmation tone after you dial the code 3 Hang up The supervisor s station user can still call the extension by using the business mode feature Do Not Disturb Override ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 355 H ...

Page 370: ...s ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 629 3 Dial the number of the extension for which you want to enable DND You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up To Cancel DND enabled at another room telephone Normally only the supervisor s station has this ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 630 3 Dial the number of the extension for which you want to disable DND You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up SL2100 ISSUE 1 ...

Page 371: ...omplement of business mode DSS Console features including One button calling to extensions Door Boxes and outside lines Busy Lamp Field BLF for extensions and Door Boxes Night Service Mode switching One button access to Service Codes and Programmable Feature Key codes Conditions None Default Settings DSS Consoles are not assigned Refer to Setting Up DSS Console Monitoring on page 1 359 after plugg...

Page 372: ...ired Component s Refer to Hotel Motel Related Features Hotel Motel Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode DSS Operation Mode 0 Business Mode 1 Hotel Mode 0 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Extension Port connected to DSS Up to eight digits No Setting 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS con...

Page 373: ...are off If the DSS key is The guest has ON Red A Message Waiting OFF No messages To check which room telephones have Wake Up Calls set 1 Without lifting the handset press the WAKE UP key Function Code 92 If the DSS key is The guest has ON Red Wake Up Call set OFF No Wake Up Call set FAST FLASH Red Wake Up Call missed ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 359 H ...

Page 374: ...igital 2W DSS Console MEDIUM FLASH Red Maid in Room FAST FLASH Red Inspect Digital 2W DSS Console To view the Status of rooms 1 54 or 61 114 Digital 2W DSS Console 1 Without lifting the handset press the PAGE SWITCHING key Function Code 95 If the DSS key is The DSS Console Indicates ON Red Buttons 1 54 are Rooms 1 54 SLOW FLASH Red Buttons 61 114 are Rooms 61 114 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 360 Hotel Motel...

Page 375: ...to the extension that initially left the message Use Message Waiting when you have mail parcels or other packages for a guest dropped off at your front desk Instead of constantly redialing the room hoping to find the guest in just send them a Message Waiting In that way you ll be sure to get a return call as soon as the guest arrives An option is available for analog Single Line Terminals with MW ...

Page 376: ...elephone Basic Data Setup Caller Name 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 15 03 11 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Type 0 FSK 1 DTMF 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 Setting Up SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 ...

Page 377: ... that extension number instead To leave a Message Waiting without first calling the extension The supervisor s station is typically the only phone with this ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 626 3 Dial the number of the room telephone where you want to leave the message waiting You hear confirmation tones To answer a Message Waiting left at your telephone Your Message Waiting lamp flashes when you...

Page 378: ...TSi and KTSi with ENQ The Lua PMS Application does not support FIAS 2 11 Fidelio protocol Conditions Up to 64 extensions can be controlled by the PMS integration the system counts from the lowest port up Connection is controlled by license SL2100 PMS LIC Default Settings Disabled Required Component s Hotel Motel Hospitality License SL2100 HOTEL LIC PMS Integration License SL2100 PMS LIC PMS API Co...

Page 379: ...5 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 Refer to the program ming manual for all the possible valid subnet mask entries default 255 255 0 0 11 14 01 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set DND for Own Extension 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 627 11 14 02 Serv...

Page 380: ...l Motel Telephone Setup Hotel Mode 0 Normal 1 Hotel 0 42 02 02 Hotel Motel Telephone Setup Toll Restriction Class When Check In 1 15 1 42 03 13 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel PMS Re striction Level 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 05 05 Hotel Room Status Printer PMS Protocol type 0 Normal 1 Fidelio 0 42 06 01 PMS Service Setting PMS Port Number 0 65535 5129 42 06 02 PMS Service Setting 3 00 AM Au...

Page 381: ... Input Data Default 42 07 01 PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table PMS Restriction Level Conversion 1 15 Level 0 10 Level 1 11 Level 2 12 Level 3 13 Operation None ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 367 H ...

Page 382: ...d available for a new guest All house cleaning is complete This option is Inspection Required on the Room Status Printout Normally only the front desk can use this option House Cleaning Options Maid Required The room is vacant was inspected and needs to be cleaned The room is not checked out and available for a new guest This option is Maid Required on the Room Status Printout Maid in Room House c...

Page 383: ...erve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 42 03 01 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Check In Operation 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 03 02 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Check Out Operation 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 03 06 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Room Status Change for Other Extension 0 Off 1 On Class 01 15 1 42 03 11 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Change Room Stat...

Page 384: ...ecked in as the guest registers at the front desk 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 638 3 Dial the extension number of the room you want to check in You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up In the STATUS mode the DSS Console key for the room is on SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 370 Hotel Motel Room Status H ...

Page 385: ...he room status 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 640 3 Dial the room status code 1 Room Clean Occupied 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required 5 Maintenance Request 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 You hear confirmation tone 4 Hang up In the STATUS mode the DSS Console shows the room status Slow Flash for Maid Required Fast Flash for I...

Page 386: ...quest 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 5 You hear confirmation tone 6 Hang up In the STATUS mode the DSS Console shows the room status Slow Flash for Maid Required Fast Flash for Inspect Room Digital 2W DSS Console SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 372 Hotel Motel Room Status H ...

Page 387: ... rooms that are Checked Out waiting to be cleaned up 313 Call Restriction List Option 2 The Call Restriction List shows the status of Room to Room Call Restriction and Toll Restriction at each phone In the following report Room to Room Barring Shows which extensions have Room to Room Call Restriction enabled 311 Outside Call Class Lists the Toll Restriction Level for each extension If an extension...

Page 388: ...at are checked out or available clean Wake Up Call List Option 5 This report lists all the rooms that have Wake Up calls 307 311 and 339 and shows the time set for each call An asterisk in front of the extension number indicates that the Wake Up Call was unanswered Consider checking on the guests that have unanswered Wake Up Calls Room Status Reports require a LAN connection Conditions None Defaul...

Page 389: ...ver 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 External Device 14 IP DECT Directory Ac cess 0 External Device 15 Presence 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 42 05 01 Hotel Room Status Printer Output Port Type 0 No Setting 3 LAN 0 42 05...

Page 390: ...peration To have your printer output the Room Status Printout Your printer should be located conveniently next your telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 642 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 376 Hotel Motel Room Status Printout H ...

Page 391: ... All Printouts 1 Room Status List Check in and House Cleaning Status 2 Call Restriction List 3 Do Not Disturb and Room Clean List 4 Message Waiting List 5 Wake Up Call List 4 Hang up ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 377 H ...

Page 392: ...l Restriction for a guest s phone neither you nor any other Hotel Mode extension can call them while they are checked in To call the guest s phone first dial 639 to cancel the restriction This may have implications in emergency situations Checking out a room by dialing Service Code 639 automatically cancels Room to Room Call Restriction Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Refer...

Page 393: ...st s telephone number You hear confirmation tone The guest cannot dial any other Hotel Mode extension Consider having a single emergency phone that is not set for Hotel Mode e g the operator The guest can always call that phone even with restriction enabled To disable Room to Room Call Restriction for a guest s telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 636 3 Dial the guest s telephone number You hear co...

Page 394: ...he code 5 to automatically leave a Message Waiting at the maintenance office In this example dialing 5 could output 1050 which would leave a Message Waiting at extension 105 Voice Mail If you have mailboxes for your services such as housekeeping your guests can leave requests even when the service providers are unavailable You cannot miss the requests and your guests can appreciate the convenience...

Page 395: ...System Options for Outgoing Calls Intercom In terdigit Time 0 64800 seconds 10 42 04 01 Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes Hotel Mode One Digit Service Codes Destination Number Up to eight digits No Setting Setting Up Operation When a guest wants to use Single Digit Dialing They lift the handset and press a single dial pad key 1 9 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 381 H ...

Page 396: ...ny cases such simplified Toll Restriction scenarios may be adequate However since each mode uses the full abilities of the system Toll Restriction programming you can make the calling restriction as elaborate as it needs to be Toll Restriction When Checked In also allows you to change the Toll Restriction of a room telephone while the room is checked in This allows you to provide more permissive T...

Page 397: ...None Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Refer to Hotel Motel Required Component s Refer to Hotel Motel Related Features Hotel Motel ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 383 H ...

Page 398: ...ass No2 5 1 21 05 07 Toll Restriction Class Permit Code Table 0 No Permit Table Assigned 1 4 Permit Tables 1 4 as signed in PRG 21 06 06 Class No1 2 6 15 0 Class No3 1 Class No4 2 Class No5 3 21 05 08 Toll Restriction Class Restriction Table 0 No Permit Table Assigned 1 4 Restrict Tables 1 4 as signed in PRG 21 06 07 0 21 05 09 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Common Speed Dials 0 Does Not R...

Page 399: ... Restriction Table Data Setup Deny Restric tion Table Table 1 4 No Setting 21 06 08 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup PBX Access Code Table 1 4 No Setting 21 06 09 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Specific Dial Outgoing Code Tables 1 20 No Set ting 21 06 10 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Outgoing Call Code Setup Tables 1 20 No set ting 42 02 02 Hotel Motel Telephone Setup Toll Restriction Clas...

Page 400: ... either changed using access code 637 or in system programming 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 637 3 Dial the number of the extension for which you want to change the Toll Restriction When Checked In level You hear a single beep 4 Enter the new Toll Restriction When Checked In level 01 15 You hear confirmation tone SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 386 Hotel Motel Toll Restriction When Checked In H ...

Page 401: ...ole Monitoring on page 1 357 Optionally have unanswered Wake Up Calls call the operator and print on the Room Status Printout report This helps you find out who needs another reminder or might need assistance See Room Status Printout on page 1 373 for more on the printed report Use Wake Up Call as a meeting reminder for convention attendees If the meeting time gets changed you can reset the remind...

Page 402: ...otel Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0 100 0 No setting 0 42 01 03 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call No Answer 0 No Transfer 1 Transfer to the Operator 0 42 01 04 System Options for Hotel Motel Setup Message Mode for Wake Up Call Hotel Mode 0 Confirmation Tone 1 VAU Message 2 Time Stamp VAU Message 3 Play Fixed VRS Message Time 0 42 01 05 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call Messa...

Page 403: ...Setting Up Operation To set a Wake Up Call for your own room 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 631 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 389 H ...

Page 404: ...rvisor s station has this ability 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 633 3 Dial the number of the room phone that should receive the wake up 4 Dial the time for your wake up Use a 24 hour clock For example 1 00 PM 1300 You hear confirmation tone 5 Hang up To cancel a Wake Up you have set for another room 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 634 3 Dial the number of the room phone whose wake up you wants to cancel You...

Page 405: ...umber When both Hot Key Pad and Dialing Number Preview are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Dialing Number Preview does not work When both Hot Key Pad and Hotline are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Hotline does not work When placing an outgoing call with the Hot Key Pad feature the user must dial the trunk access code before dialing the called party number The ARS feature can be used...

Page 406: ...Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hot Key Pad 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 Operation To place an intercom call using Hot Key Pad The Multiline Terminal is idle No need to press Speaker key 1 Dial the extension 2 Dialed extension rings To place a trunk call using Hot Key Pad The Multiline Terminal is idle No need to press Speaker key 1 Dial the trunk access code 0 by default and the external destinat...

Page 407: ...hotlines available Conditions An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner s extension If a station is an ACD agent the Hotline key blinks to indicate the ACD agent s status Hotline keys can be assigned to the DSS consoles Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing mode set at the called extension...

Page 408: ...0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 21 01 09 System Options for Outgoing Calls Ringdown Extension Timer Hotline Start 0 64800 seconds 0 21 11 01 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension Hot line Destination Number 1 0 Pause Hook Flash Code to wait for answer s...

Page 409: ...l DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 0 30 05 19 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 4 30 05 20 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 5 30 05 21 DSS Console Lamp Table VM Message Indica tion 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 3 Table 1 19 Extension Busy Setup PRG 20 13 06 PRG 20 02 03 BLF Status Busy Status 1 1 0 Off No 2 1 1 On Yes 3 0 0 On Yes 4 0...

Page 410: ...To answer a call from your Hotline partner 1 If you hear two beeps speak toward the telephone OR If your telephone rings lift the handset SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 396 Hotline H ...

Page 411: ...ling Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 20 18 02 Service Tone Timers Busy Tone Timer 0 64800 seconds 15 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count 0 255 0 Endless Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup B...

Page 412: ...Operation None SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 398 Howler Tone Service H ...

Page 413: ... When the guard detects any fraudulent activity it will send email notifications to users informing them of the suspicion The application has the ability to modify PBX configuration so that further fraudulent activity does not takes place it takes the following actions for the same If the same extension is making a high number of calls it can be moved to a restricted toll restriction class to prev...

Page 414: ...ame Input Data Default 14 01 06 Basic Trunk Data Setup SMDR Printout 0 No Print Out 1 Prints Out 0 15 01 03 User Basic Setup SMDR Printout 0 Do not print on SMDR report 1 Include on SMDR report 1 15 01 14 User Basic Setup SMDR Output of Maid Inter com Calls 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 15 01 15 User Basic Setup SMDR Output of Answered Intercom Calls 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 35 01 01 SMDR Options Output Port T...

Page 415: ...5 01 07 SMDR Options Minimum Ring Time For Incom ing Calls 0 65535 seconds 0 All 0 35 01 08 SMDR Options Format Selection 0 NA Type North America 1 G J Type Overseas Japan 0 35 02 14 SMDR Output Options Date 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 Operation Refer to the InGuard Installation Manual for additional details ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 401 I ...

Page 416: ...up is set to 50 in Program 45 01 01 InMail extensions 213 228 are set to DP in Program 15 03 01 InMail extensions 213 228 are set to Special in Program 15 03 03 Call Forwarding to Voice Mail An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail Once forwarded calls to the extension connect to that extension mailbox The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of calling back later Forwa...

Page 417: ...r Mailbox can be a mailbox for an installed uninstalled or virtual extension Voice Mail Caller ID InMail can use ANI Caller ID information to identify the outside caller that left a message in a user s mailbox When the message recipient presses TI after hearing a message they hear the time the message was sent and the outside telephone number of the message sender Refer to Caller ID on page 1 149 ...

Page 418: ...ers incoming calls and routes them quickly and efficiently Integrated Voice Mail features include Conversation Record Answering Machine Emulation and Caller ID with Return Call Interactive Softkeys guide the display telephone user through the extensive InMail feature set Digital IP Multiline Terminal Table 1 20 Related Part Number and Capacity Stock Number Equipment Name Note BE116497 IP7AU CPU C1...

Page 419: ...y the caller can dial 4 to hear additional matches if any 6 The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach and InMail sends the call to that extension The call is sent as a Screened or Unscreened transfer depending on programming For callers to use Directory Dialing the system must have a name programmed for each extension up to 15 characters A Z using upper and lower case letters...

Page 420: ...ir voice mail Call Forwarding does not have to be programmed manually by each user Caller ID information is passed from the Voice Mail to an extension for pre answer display on an unscreened transfer from Voice Mail Off premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines When the voice mail places a call on hold it uses Group Hold Any line appearances for the trunk shows t...

Page 421: ...w Refer to the PCPro wizards for further detailed programming When a is listed next to the Program Number it indicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Extension Number Dial Up to 8 digits Extension Port Num ber Extension Number 001 064 101 164 065 128 No Setting 15 03 01 Single Li...

Page 422: ... 0 14 01 22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID to Voice Mail 0 Disable Caller ID not sent to VM 1 Enable Caller ID is sent to VM 1 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color 0 Green 1 Red 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 20 02 09 System Options for M...

Page 423: ...le 1 16 0000 47 12 07 InMail Answer Schedules InMail Answer Sched ules Schedule Start Time HHMM 24 hour clock For example 0130 1 30 AM 1700 5 00 PM 0000 Undefined Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 0830 8 30AM All other schedules are 0000 47 12 08 InMail Answer Schedules InMail Answer Sched ules Schedule End Time HHMM 24 hour clock For example 0130 1 30 AM 1700 5 00 PM 0000 Undefined Answer Table 1 Schedul...

Page 424: ...displayed 1 On Caller ID is displayed 1 15 02 28 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Color 0 Green 1 Red 0 15 03 09 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Function 0 Disable Caller ID not dis played 1 Enable Caller ID is dis played 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class...

Page 425: ...tension Ring Group Assignment Extension Number Maximum eight Digits Group01 has 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 and 108 First 8 ports ringing 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Number of Transferring Desti nation Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 No Setting 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination Incoming Ring Group Number 0 No Setting 01 50 Incoming Ring group 102 VM 103 Centralized VM Group01 has 101 102 103 104 105 106 ...

Page 426: ... Between Non Pag er Callout Attempts 1 255 minutes 20 minutes 47 01 11 InMail System Options Wait Between Busy Non Pager Callout Attempts 1 255 minutes 15 minutes 47 01 12 InMail System Options Wait Between RNA Non Pager Callout Attempts 1 255 minutes 30 minutes 47 01 13 InMail System Options Number of RNA rings 1 99 rings 5 rings 47 01 14 InMail System Options Number of Cascading Attempts 1 99 ri...

Page 427: ... Call Rout ing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox Number 1 3 digits 00 32 00 Undefined No entry Entered by pressing CLEAR 1 47 02 15 InMail Station Mailbox Options Directory List Number 0 None 1 8 List Number All 0 47 02 25 InMail Station Mailbox Options Security Code Option 0 Always 1 Remote Logon only 0 47 06 01 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Number of Messages 00 99 messages To conserve storage spa...

Page 428: ...ectory 4 Distribution Mailboxes 01 08 1 Call Routing Mailboxes 09 32 2 Announcement 47 08 01 Call Routing Mailbox Options Dial Action Table 1 32 Dial Action Table 1 32 1 Dial Action Table 1 47 08 02 Call Routing Mailbox Options Screened Trans fer Timeout 0 255 seconds Entering 0 causes immediate re call 15 seconds 47 08 03 Call Routing Mailbox Options Time Limit for Di aling Commands 0 99 seconds ...

Page 429: ...the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting if re corded and can leave a message If the Default Mailbox is a Master Mailbox the outside caller hears the recorded announcement Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed InMail then hangs up reroutes the call or provides additional dialing options If the Default Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox t...

Page 430: ...yxx Start Day For Range of Days Type 2 Answer Schedules use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should start 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 2 All Other Schedules 1 47 12 05 InMail Answer Schedules End Day Entryxx End Day For Range of Days Type 2 Answer Schedules use this option to select the day of the week...

Page 431: ...0 dBm 4 20 dBm 45 dBm 5 25 dBm 50 dBm 6 30 dBm 55 dBm Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values Operation Calling Your Mailbox To call your mailbox With a Multiline Terminal your Voice Mail key flashes green and your Message Center keys flash red when they have messages waiting If you do not have a Voice Mail key your Message Waiting LED flashes instead Multiline Terminal 1 Press you...

Page 432: ...sion the extension you call can be busy in DND or unanswered 1 Press the Voice Mail key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 code 77 InMail pilot OR Dial 8 The Voice Mail System prompts you to leave a message Forwarding Calls to Your Mailbox To activate or cancel Call Forwarding 1 Press Speaker key or lift the handset at the Single Line Terminal and choose from the following dial access codes 741 Call Forward Imme...

Page 433: ...SC 751 code 77 InMail pilot 3 Hang up Voice Mail prompts your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash Dial Voice Mail master number followed by destination mailbox If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail the call waits before routing the called user s mailbox This gives you the option of retrieving the call instead of havin...

Page 434: ...ward Busy 743 Call Forward No Answer 744 Call Forward Busy No Answer 745 Call Forward Both Ring 746 Call Forwarding Follow Me 2 Dial the Voice Mail master number 3 Press Speaker key to hang up or hang up handset at the Single Line Terminal When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller s message you can Your telephone must be idle not on a call 1 Do nothing The message is automat...

Page 435: ...r you should enter the person s first name or last name To exit Directory Dialing without selecting a name dial 3 The Automated Attendant announces the name matches and tells you which digit to dial 1 3 to reach each of the announced names To hear additional name matches if any dial 6 instead 4 After you make your selection the Automated Attendant routes your call to the name you select Schedule t...

Page 436: ... 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5 00 PM Answer Schedule 3 Answer Schedule 3 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Tuesday from 9 00 AM to 10 00 AM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 1 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB num 4 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 3 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 05 Entry01 End Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 06 Entry01 Date MMDD 0000 Entry does not matter...

Page 437: ... 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 2 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 4 Wednesday 47 12 05 Entry01 End Day 5 Thursday 47 12 06 Entry01 Date MMDD 0000 Entry does not matter 47 12 07 Entry01 Start Time 1100 11 00 AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1300 1 00 PM Type 3 Date Answer Schedule Options Type 3 Date Example In this example Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows Sched...

Page 438: ...es not matter 47 12 07 Entry01 Start Time 0830 8 30 AM 47 12 08 Entry01 End Time 1700 5 00 PM Answer Schedule 2 Answer Schedule 2 is a Date schedule that runs only on Christ mas day from 8 30 AM to 5 00 PM 47 12 01 Entry01 Schedule Type 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Ctg 3 47 12 02 Entry01 MB Num 9 47 12 03 Entry01 Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 04 Entry01 Start Day 1 Entry does not matter 47 12 05 Entr...

Page 439: ...VM InMail are available from default on CPU C1 If after auto setting PRG 45 01 01 and PRG 16 02 01 are changed the system must be reset for the changes to take affect InMail Auto Setting does not change extension number assignments in PRG11 02 01 If the ex tension numbers for ports 113 128 were deleted then the InMail ports will not have extension numbers and the voice mail feature will not work p...

Page 440: ...TMF Extensions 213 228 Dial Pulse 0 Other Extensions DTMF 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Termi nal Type 0 Normal 1 Special Extensions 213 228 Special 1 Other Extensions Normal 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment 1 50 If department group 50 al ready used InMail auto set ting does not function Extensions 213 228 50 Other Extensions Group 1 Operation Cold Start 1 Turn SL2100 pow...

Page 441: ...l does not prompt for a password on a call from the set CID number To use this feature the voice mailbox number must be set in PRG13 04 11 If not set the system requires the normal log in procedure or entering a valid mailbox and security code to login Two different mailboxes can not be tied to the same inbound CID number If two mailboxes are set for the same inbound CID number the system uses the...

Page 442: ...me Input Data Default 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Number Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 13 04 02 Speed Dialing Number and Name Name Maximum 12 Characters Use di al pad to enter name No Setting 13 04 11 Speed Dialing Number and Name Mailbox Num ber 0 128 900 931 0 15 22 01 Mobil...

Page 443: ...able Transfer Destination Number 2 0 No setting 01 50 Incoming Ring Group 102 VM 103 Centralized VM 201 232 Department Group 400 VRS 401 DISA 501 599 DISA 1000 1999 Common ABB Di al 000 999 0 25 03 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Incoming Group Number 0 Disconnect 01 25 Incoming Ring Group 102 VMI 103 Centralized VM 104 Assign the Speed Dial Number 1 25 04 01 VRS DISA Transf...

Page 444: ...3 04 11 Speed Dial area No 0 100 VM BOX 1 Call the DID number to set the transfer to InMail from outside party 2 After the VM is answered user can enter VM Box 100 directly To retrieve VM messages from Mobile extension Trunk 1 214 555 2000 DIL Mobile extension number 4321 PRG 22 02 01 Trunk 1 DIL PRG 22 07 01 VM Pilot number 300 PRG 15 22 01 Mobile Extension Target Setup No 0 4321 PRG 13 04 11 Spe...

Page 445: ...user enables Cascading Message Notification the system will try each enabled destination that is active for the current day and time i e in schedule The system will not try any destinations that are disabled or are not in schedule When the retries for a particular destination have been met the system will immediately move to the next destination Conditions Retry Interval timers are set on a system...

Page 446: ...Figure 1 19 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 1 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 432 InMail Cascade Message Notification I ...

Page 447: ...Figure 1 20 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 2 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 433 I ...

Page 448: ...e numbers assuming the retry attempts are at default The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external numbers by the system dial plan settings Depending on the system ARS routing maybe needed to properly route external calls 1 The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 434 InMail Cascade Message Notification I ...

Page 449: ...ximum number of callout attempts is reached the next new message will restart the process Message Notification to Pager Numbers Below a basic overview of how Message Notification works with pager numbers assuming the retry attempts are at default The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external numbers by the system dial plan settings Depending on the system ARS routing mayb...

Page 450: ...InMail System Options Wait Between RNA Non Pager Callout Attempts 1 255 minutes 30 minutes 47 01 13 InMail System Options Number of RNA rings 1 99 rings 5 rings 47 01 14 InMail System Options Number of Cascading Attempts 1 99 rings 1 ring 47 02 23 InMail Station Mailbox Options All Message No tification Enabled 0 No 1 Yes 1 47 02 28 InMail Station Mailbox Options Message Notifi cation Queuing Opti...

Page 451: ... Options Notification Day of week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 22 01 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification 0 Off 1 On 0 47 22 02 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification Begin Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 47 22 03 Group Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification End Hour 00 23 00 12 00 AM 23 11 00 PM 00 47 22 04 Group Mailbox Message Notificat...

Page 452: ...rminal 1 Access the All Message Notification Setting menu Log onto Subscriber Mailbox V m a i l M a i l b o x 1 0 1 M s g s N e w 0 A r c h 0 L s t n G r e e t L v M s g M o r e Dial OP 67 Press More Setup Mailbox Options menu C o n f i g u r e M b o x 1 0 1 C o d e N o t f y C a l l H M o r e Dial N 6 Press Notify Notification Type Selection menu M e s s a g e N o t i f i c a t i o n P h o n e E ...

Page 453: ... P h o n e N o t i f i c a t i o n O n D e s t 4 D e s t 5 B a c k M o r e Soft key Operation IP Multiline Telephone 2W Digital Multiline Telephone Only Dest1 Destination 1 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 1 Menu Dest2 Destination 2 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 2 Menu Dest3 Destination 3 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 3 Menu Dest4 Destination 4 Proceed ...

Page 454: ...Disbl Disable Turn destination x notifications off Change Change Go to destination x notification setting menus Back Back Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu Key Operation Key 2 Go to destination x notification setting menus Key 3 Toggle destination x notifications on off Key Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu 5 Message Notification Programming Begin Hour N o t i f i...

Page 455: ...y o f W e e k T u e D i s a b l d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t 10 Message Notification Programming Wednesday D a y o f W e e k W e d E n a b l e d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t D a y o f W e e k W e d D i s a b l d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t 11 Message Notification Programming Thursday D a y o f W e e k T h u E n a b l e d E n b l D i s b l N e x t E x i t D a y o f W e e k T h u D...

Page 456: ... e a r N e x t E x i t 16 Message Notification Programming Security Code Required S e c u r i t y C o d e O p t i o n R e q N o R e q N e x t E x i t Soft key Operation IP Multiline Telephone 2W Digital Multiline Telephone Only Req Required Turn Security Code Required flag On NoReq Not Required Turn Security Code Required flag Off Next Next Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt count me...

Page 457: ...eep current setting and return to main Notification menu 18 Message Notification Programming RNA Attempt count Soft key Operation IP Multiline Telephone Digital Multiline Telephone Only Next Next Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification menu Exit Exit Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu Key Operation Key 0 9 Set RNA Attempt count Key Keep current setting and proc...

Page 458: ...Back More Phone Notification Log onto Subscriber Mailbox Mailbox Options menu Notification Type Selection menu All Message Notifcations Setting menu Notifcation Destination Selection menu A B Press Notify Dial 6 Press VM xx Press More Press Phone Dial 7 Press Off Dial 6 Press On Dial 6 Press Dest Dial 3 Press Dest Dial 3 Press On Press Off Press Back Dial Press Dest1 Dial Press Dest2 Dial Press De...

Page 459: ... Disbl Press Disbl Press Chnge Dial 2 Press Chnge Dial 2 Press Chnge Dial 2 Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Dial 2 digit 01 12 Press Next Dial Press Next Dial Press PM Dial 7 Press AM Dial 2 Press Next Dial Press PM Dial 7 Press AM Dial 2 Press Exit Dial Press Exit Dial Dial 2 digit 01 12 Press Next Dial Press Exit Dial Press Exit Dial Press Next Dial Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Enbl Press Back Di...

Page 460: ...Press Next Dial Press Disbl Press Enbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Message Notification Programming Thursday Press Next Dial Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Enbl Press Back Dial Press Next Dial Press Disbl Press Enbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Message Notification Programming Friday Press Next Dial Press Disbl Dial 3 Press Enbl Press Back Dial Press Next Dial Press Disbl Press Enbl Dial 3 Press Back Dial Message ...

Page 461: ...ting the Email Notification Data In order for the installation site s InMail to send email notifications it must have a valid SMTP email account assigned To save time during programming use the following table to help collect the system s email account information The email account provider can supply this information See Programming in this feature for more Table 1 21 InMail Email Account Informa...

Page 462: ...text Outside Caller Reply To 1 is The Reply To Email Address data from PRG 47 18 09 OR The Send From Email Address data from PRG 47 18 09 SMS Text Message Delivery to a Cell Phone The table below shows the basic format of a InMail email notification delivered to a cell phone as an SMS Text Message The information is much the same as that delivered to an email account There may be more than one tex...

Page 463: ...E MESSAGE FROM XXXX 0M6S VOICE MESSAGE ARRIVED ON MONDAY SEPT 17 3 51 PMDURATION 0M 6S NEC 1 OF 2 SENT 3 51PM 09 17 POP3 Login InMail Email Notification supports POP3 Login The logic of this method is that it allows a user to send e mail from any location as long as they can demonstrably also fetch their mail from the same place Check with your email provider to see if this type of login is requir...

Page 464: ...zon yourcellphonenumber vtext com Virgin Mobile yourcellphonenumber vmobl com A Universal SMS Portal Teleflip yourcellphonenumber teleflip com A More Complete SMS Portal Listing For a more complete SMS portal list see http www livejournal com tools textmessage bml mode details Conditions The E MAIL notification feature is licensed on a per system basis Refer to the InMail Feature Manual for more i...

Page 465: ...bscriber Options Include Msg as Attachment 0 No 1 Yes 1 47 06 21 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options All Message Notification Enabled 0 No 1 Yes 1 47 06 25 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Email mes sage Save Delete Option 0 No Change 1 Save 2 Delete 0 47 06 26 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Message Notification Queuing Option 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 47 18 01 SMTP Setup SMTP Enabled 0 No 1 Yes 0 47 ...

Page 466: ...tation Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification Day of week Wednesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 20 13 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification Day of week Thursday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 20 14 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification Day of week Friday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 20 15 Station Mailbox Message Notification Options Notification Day of week...

Page 467: ...n Options Notification Day of week Saturday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Operation Table 1 26 Turn Email Notification On or Off 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal To Turn Email Notification On or Off 1 Log onto Subscriber Mailbox 2 Optns Select Mailbox Options Alternately dial OP 67 3 Notfy Select Notification Alternately dial N 6 4 Email Select Email Alternately dial E 6 5 Do one of the following a On Se...

Page 468: ...tinations Find Me Follow Me skips an active in schedule number that is busy in DND or is unanswered When all active in schedule destinations have been tried the caller can then choose to try Find Me Follow Me again or select another option You can set up Find Me Follow Me for an extension in system programming In addition an extension user can set up Find Me Follow Me from their Mailbox Options Co...

Page 469: ...day 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 21 07 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Day of week Tuesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 21 08 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Day of week Wednesday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 21 09 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Day of week Thursday 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 21 10 Station Mailbox Find Me F...

Page 470: ...for IP Multiline Terminal 2W Digital Multiline Terminal Setting Up Message Notification Log On to Subscriber Mailbox OP 67 Access the Mailbox Options menu Setup CH 26 Access the Call Handling Options Menu CallH 1 Access the Find Me Follow Me Options Menu FMFM InMail states your Find Me Follow Me status On or Off O 6 Turn Find Me Follow Me on or off On Off D 3 Change your Find Me Follow Me destinat...

Page 471: ...eek Sunday Saturday Enable or Disable E 3 Enable selected day Enbl D 3 Disable selected day Disbl Back up to the previous level without changing your entry Exit Enter the destination phone or extension number up to 16 digits OK Accept entered number Clear Clear entered number Next Skip to next setting Back up to the previous level without changing your entry Back Go back to the Mailbox Options men...

Page 472: ...default Voice Prompt language is initially available in the CPU C1 board IP7AU CPU C1 AU English All the supported Languages are initially available in the IP7WW SDVMS C1 IP7WW SDVML C1 Supported Languages InMail Languages Telephone Display Languages 01 US English 02 UK English 03 Australian English 04 French Canadian 05 Dutch 06 Mexican Spanish 07 Latin America Spanish 08 Italian 09 German 10 Mad...

Page 473: ...exten sion 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 665 20 13 53 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Language Selection for specific extension 0 Disable 1 Enable COS 01 15 0 Operation To Language Setting Operation The Display Information and Soft keys are available for IP Multiline Terminal 2W Digital Multiline Terminal From an Idle Display Phone When PRG15 02 60 0 Prog Press Program Softkey Press down ...

Page 474: ...ilbox language press VMail Softkey Own To change your own extension display language press Own Softkey Choose Lang Select desired language press down arrow to advance to next page Press softkey for desired language Press Speaker Exit Other To change another spoken mailbox language press Other softkey Ext Enter the extension number to be changed Choose Lang Select desired language press down arrow ...

Page 475: ...rns to these options if the Park is not picked up 3 Dial 3 for Find Me Follow Me if enabled The caller returns to these options if the none of the destinations choose to take the call 4 Dial 4 for other options Normally this routes to the extension s Next Call Routing Mailbox InMail Park and Page is available at Personal and Group Subscriber Mailboxes and can be enabled through system programming ...

Page 476: ...ting can leave a message and dial options from the Next Call Routing Mailbox Defined 1 Yes 1 Yes If unanswered caller can dial 1 to leave a message 2 to Park and Page and 4 for other options from the Next Call Routing Mailbox For automated attendant unscreened UTRF and screened STRF transfers refer to Table 1 28 Park and Page Call Handling on page 1 462 Table 1 28 Park and Page Call Handling Park ...

Page 477: ...ons System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s IP7 CPU C1 board Related Features Park Paging Internal Paging External Guide to Feature Programming Setting Up Park and Page for Extension Program No Program Name Input Data Default 47 02 04 InMail Station Mailbox Options Message Play back Order 0 FIFO first in first out or old est messages first 1 LIFO last in first out or newes...

Page 478: ...ecording Your Paging Message Recording Your Paging Message In these Instructions Telephone Softkey To record your Paging Message 1 Log onto your Subscriber Mailbox 2 More More Page Select Paging Message Alternately dial PG 74 3 Do one of the following a Lstn Select to listen to the current Paging Message if any Alternately dial L 5 Exit the listen mode b Rec Select to record the Paging Message Alt...

Page 479: ...y dial CO 26 3 Do one of the following a DVM Select to turn Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on or off Alternately dial O 6 Paging Select to turn Park and Page on or off Alternately dial E 3 Back Select to go back to the Mailbox Options Menu To retrieve a call parked in a personal parked orbit refer to Table 1 31 Picking Up a Parked Call on page 1 465 Table 1 31 Picking Up a Parked Call Pi...

Page 480: ...ate 64 kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 kHz Audio Format CCITT A law μ law User Pro Access Options There are two different User Pro login types available to make changes To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SL2100 LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 User Admin Mode UA Mode This mode allows the user admin to access any ...

Page 481: ...o interpret the message name to determine this information Table 1 32 Default Incoming Ringing Tone File Name Format BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav maximum 32 characters B Mailbox number maximum eight digits or VRS for the VRS message T Message Type Greeting or VRS message Recorded message NNN Message number three digits YYYY Year MM Month 1 12 DD Date 1 31 HH Hour 00 23 MM Minute 00 59 SS Second 0 59 ...

Page 482: ...tual file name of the messages is not displayed in User Pro The message number modified date and file size are displayed instead If there is no message file will be displayed and the download delete icon will not be displayed The User Pro message page does not refresh automatically to see new messages the page must be refreshed For instance if a new message is received via regular operation on the...

Page 483: ...sion When the mailbox is being used by another session either PC or phone There is no available space in the SD When there is no available space in the SD The file is being used by another session Please try again later When the file to be downloaded is being used by another session either PC or phone The selected file has already been deleted When the file selected for download has already been d...

Page 484: ...nter username Extension Number and password 1111 3 You will then see the main menu click on the InMail Audio Up Download icon The message numbers correspond to the same message number when accessed via the telephone Message 1 is the first message message 2 is the second message etc 4 To delete a message click on the red X to the right of the appropriate message 5 To listen to a message Click on th...

Page 485: ...Mail they must be in the proper format Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not playback on the Inmail The proper format is Bit Rate 64 kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCITT A law 1 To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the CPU LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 2 At the login screen enter us...

Page 486: ...e trunk This feature provides a user information which can determine whether they should use the Barge In feature for the extension or trunk This information automatically displays for a Multiline Terminal once programmed Conditions Intercom calls can ring or be voice announced at the called extension Intercom Abandoned Call Display remembers Intercom calls to an extension Ringing Line Preference ...

Page 487: ...h 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Dutch 7 Portuguese 8 Norwegian 9 Danish 10 Swedish 11 Turkish 12 Latin American Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish 16 Russian 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Intercom Calls 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 08 11 Class of Serv...

Page 488: ...1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 08 10 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Signal Voice Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS ...

Page 489: ...Mid Low 1400 760 660 540 540 540 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 9 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 2000 2000 1100 1100 540 760 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 10 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 2000 2000 1100 1100 540 760 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Operation To place an Intercom call 1 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At Single Line ...

Page 490: ...tension numbers information by pressing Help key the extension number 3 Press Exit key to return the normal time date display To change how Intercom calls ring the extension 1 Press Speaker key or lift the handset 2 Dial 723 to have calls ring your extension OR 3 Dial 721 to have calls voice announce to your extension SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 476 Intercom I ...

Page 491: ... are initially sorted by name Buddy Lists can also be sorted by a Division Department defined in system programming or sorted by Presence Status Call Control The InUC Web Client can control a user s phyiscal terminal giving them the ability to make and receive internal and outside calls InUC Web Client can perform the following Call Control functions Call Answer Hold Resume or UnHold Transfer Conf...

Page 492: ...e information and status messages are not retained Users must reset all presence and status messages In a NetLink environment InUC Web Client users must point to the URL of the main system Pointing to the URL in the secondary system will display an error 204 no content SL2100 supports a maximum of 128 InUC Web Client users Instant Message is a one to one or one to many but is not many to many For ...

Page 493: ...r enables headset mode PRG 11 11 65 a Headset key 05 must be programmed on the phone for the InUC web cleint to be able to control the phone Call History is only shown when logged in with desktop phone mode Call History only supports multiline terminals Call History shows up to 50 called numbers and up to 10 incoming numbers If the number of calls exceeds these limits the oldest calls are eliminat...

Page 494: ... Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 External Device 14 IP DECT Directory Ac cess 0 External Device 15 Presence 0 15 02 34 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Call Reg ister Mode 0 Trunk Mode 1 Extension Trunk Mode 0 15 02 73 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Calling Party History View Mode 0 pack 1 unpack 0 20 57 01 UC User Information Set...

Page 495: ...te Prov Maximum of 32 characters No Setting 20 57 22 UC User Information Settings Zip Postal Maximum of 32 characters No Setting 20 57 23 UC User Information Settings Country Maximum of 32 characters No Setting 20 57 24 UC User Information Settings Profile Name Maximum of 256 characters No Setting 20 57 41 UC User Information Settings Extension Num ber Maximum of 8 digits No Setting 20 57 42 UC Us...

Page 496: ...on Color 0 Green 1 Orange 2 Red 0 20 70 03 Custom Presence Status Setting Status Name Up to 16 characters No Setting 90 54 01 PC Web Programming Setting WebPro TCP Port Number 0 65535 80 90 54 03 PC Web Programming Setting Web Program ming TCP Port HTTPS 0 65535 0 HTTP access is not available 443 Operation Refer to the SL2100 InUC Web Client User Guide for more information SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 482 I...

Page 497: ... LAN Connection The IP Terminal has two RJ 45 connections on the back marked PC and LAN This allows the IP Terminal and a PC to share one cable run and switch port If installing an IP Terminal at a location that has a PC connected to the data network one of the following methods can be used Using a different cable Leave the PC connected to the LAN Patch a switch port to the new cable run Connect a...

Page 498: ...ding setting at remote side router This feature is effective when PRG 15 05 45 is set 1 On Example of NAT Traversal network and necessary settings for System and IP Terminal are shown in below Figure 1 23 Example NAT Traversal on page 1 484 Table 1 34 Example System Setting on page 1 484 and Table 1 35 Example IP Terminal Setting on page 1 485 Actual input data should be set according to the requi...

Page 499: ...tion setting itself If PRG 15 05 45 is set to 0 then port forwarding at the Remote side router is required This feature requires installation of a VoIPDB Depend on the router it may close the port being used if packet exchange is not performed during a certain time frame In this case change PRG 84 23 01 and PRG 84 23 02 to a shorter interval SIP ALG function of ALL routers in the network must be d...

Page 500: ...04 02 is set to 1 or 2 music is provided by the IP Terminal Registration Mode The SL2100 has three types of registration for IP Terminals Plug and Play Automatic and Manual programmed in PRG 10 46 01 Plug and Play mode when the phone boots up it reports the extension assigned in the phone or chooses the next available extension in the system No password is required Automatic mode the SIP user name...

Page 501: ... SIP trunks do not suffer from this problem Conditions More than 17 IP Multiline Terminals are not recommended when the same Virtual Extension Keys are assigned to each IP Multiline Terminal The voice quality of VoIPDB depends on variables such as available bandwidth network latency and Quality of Service QoS initiatives all of which are controlled by the network and Internet service providers Bec...

Page 502: ... or Softphone with DSS Console The SL2100 Desktop Application does not support Network Address Translation NAT Because of this any Desktop Applications must appear to be on the same network as the SL2100 VoIP Interface VoIPDB For remote Desktop Applications like SP310 Softphone this can be achieved by a VPN connection to the network the SL2100 resides on When using Override with an active CTI conn...

Page 503: ...e 0 Plug and Play 1 Auto 2 Manual 0 15 05 15 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup CO DEC Type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 1 15 05 39 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup CTI Override Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 15 05 45 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup NAT plug play 0 OFF 1 ON 1 15 05 47 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Regis tration Expire Timer for NAT 0 Disable 60...

Page 504: ... Ad dress Default Gateway WAN 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 CPU Network Setup IP Address VoIPDB 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask VoIPDB 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255...

Page 505: ...erver Information Setup Sub scribe Session Port 0 65535 5081 10 46 14 DT800 DT700 Server Information Setup NAT Mode 0 Off 1 On 0 10 58 01 Network Address Network Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 58 02 Network Address Subnet Mask 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 2...

Page 506: ...formation Setup Subscribe Expire Timer 60 65535 seconds 3600 seconds 84 24 28 DT800 DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup Audio Capability Priority 0 G 711 2 G 729 3 G 722 0 84 26 01 VoIP Basic Setup DSP IP Address xxx xxx xxx xxx 172 16 0 20 84 26 02 VoIP Basic Setup DSP RTP Port Number 0 65534 10020 84 26 03 VoIP Basic Setup DSP RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 10021 In addition to the...

Page 507: ...ed to provide toll quality equivalent speech path The following voice compression methods are supported for the IP Station SIP feature G 711 A law Highest Bandwidth G 722 Wideband G 729 Mid Range Bandwidth For the minimum bandwidth requirements for each voice call refer to Table 1 37 Minimum Bandwidth Requirements on page 1 493 This includes all the overhead of VoIP communication including signali...

Page 508: ...ny Polycom Soundstation valid Username and Password required SIP Stations which support RFC 3842 Message Waiting receive Message Waiting Lamp indications SIP Station VoIPDB supports NAT traversal SIP Station VoIPDB does not support a Blind Transfer feature Supports video codecs H 264 H 263 and H 261 Video is supported when P2P for standard SIP is turned on PRG 10 26 03 SIP Peer to Peer Mode ON Aut...

Page 509: ...ble 1 38 Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device Feature Name Standard SIP Comments Note Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial No Account Code Forced Verified Unverified Yes Depending on SIP device the account code may have to be part of the dial string Account Code Forced Verified Unverified No Account Code Entry Yes Depending on SIP device the account code may have to be part of the dial string A...

Page 510: ...e and Date No Code Restriction Toll Restriction Yes Code Restriction Override Toll Re striction Override No Code Restriction Dial Block Toll Re striction Dial Block Yes Conference Yes Conference Remote Yes Conference Voice Call Privacy Re lease No Data Line Security Yes Barge In is not supported Delayed Ringing No Department Calling No Department Step Calling Yes Dial Pad Confirmation Tone No Dial...

Page 511: ...ntercom Yes InMail Yes IP Multiline Station SIP No IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol Yes IP Trunk H 323 No ISDN Compatibility Yes Last Number Redial No Line Preference No Long Conversation Cutoff Yes Meet Me Conference No Meet Me Paging Yes Meet Me Paging Transfer Yes A SIP device can receive a Meet Me Paging Transfer but it cannot originate a Meet Me Paging transfer call Memo Dial No Messa...

Page 512: ...ing Groups Yes Ringdown Extension Hotline Inter nal External Yes A SIP device can be a ring down destination but cannot originate a ring down call Room Monitor No Save Number Dialed No Secondary Incoming Extension No Secretary Call Buzzer No Secretary Call Pickup No Selectable Display Messaging No Selectable Ring Tones Yes Selectable Ring Tones is a function of the client device Serial Call No Sin...

Page 513: ...set to the suitable place of Program 24 09 02 24 09 05 If CFW is not set the calling terminal hears a Lock out tone shown in Table 1 39 Tones when calling the SIP terminal in out of range on page 1 499 and the following Out of Range notice shown in Figure 1 24 Example of LCD indication for out of range on page 1 499 is displayed on the originators LCD Table 1 39 Tones when calling the SIP terminal...

Page 514: ...m waits for the timer in PRG24 02 15 default 4sec to expire to determine if the terminal is Out of Range state or not When the SIP terminal starts ringing and then moves to out of range the terminal keeps ringing because the terminal is no longer under the control of the system In this case the Out of Range transfer is not applied Out of Range transfer is applied to an individual call only group i...

Page 515: ...ess assigned in PRG 10 12 09 UDP Ports 10020 10083 MUST be forwarded to the IP Address assigned in PRG 84 26 01 Default Settings None System Availability Terminals SIP Terminals Compliant with RFC 3261 RFC 3262 RFC 3264 Session Description Protocol RFC 1889 Real Time Protocol Required Component s CPU VoIPDB SL2100 IP EXT 01 LIC License Code 5111 Related Features IP Single Line Telephone SIP Call F...

Page 516: ...rce Selection 0 Common use for both IP ex tensions and trunks 1 Use for IP extensions 2 Use for SIP trunks 3 User for Networking 5 Blocked 6 Common without unicast paging 7 Multicast paging 8 Unicast paging Resource 1 128 0 10 26 03 IP System Operation Setup SIP Peer to Peer Mode 0 Off 1 On 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Termi nal Type 0 Normal 1 Special 0 VoIP ToS Setup The SL2...

Page 517: ...10 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Jitter Buffer Standard 0 300 ms 40 84 19 11 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Jitter Buffer Maximum 0 300 ms 80 84 19 17 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Jitter Buffer Mode 1 static 3 adaptive immediately 3 84 19 18 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Silence Compression VAD Threshold 1 30 self adjustment and 1...

Page 518: ...etup TCF Handling Method 0 Receive TCF signal by VoIPDB 1 Through TCF signal to exter nal FAX 1 84 33 18 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup T 38 RTP Format Payload Number 0 2 8 96 127 103 84 34 01 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Relay Mode 0 Disable 1 RFC2833 2 H 245 0 84 34 02 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTMF Payload Number 96 127 110 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Program No Program Name Input Data...

Page 519: ... Data Setup Re ceiving SIP INFO 0 Disable 1 Allowed any time 2 Allowed while RTP is not available 1 Out of Range Notification Program No Program Name Input Data Default 24 02 03 System Options for Transfer Delayed Call For warding Time 0 64800 seconds 10 24 02 15 System Options for Transfer SIP Out of Range Timer 0 30 seconds 4 24 09 01 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Type 0 Call Forwa...

Page 520: ...m No Program Name Input Data Default 10 12 03 CPU Network Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 07 CPU Network Setup NAPT Router IP Ad dress Default Gateway WAN 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 26 03 IP System Operation Setup SIP Peer to Peer Mode 0 Off 1 On 1 10 33 02 SI...

Page 521: ...8 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 15 05 16 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Au thentication Password Up to 24 characters No Setting 15 05 45 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup NAT plug play 0 OFF 1 ON 1 15 05 47 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Regis tration Expire Timer for NAT 0 Disable 60...

Page 522: ...on Default Assigned Data Comments 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter a Static IP Address for the SIP Terminal 2 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Enter the Subnet Mask Address 3 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Enter the Default Gateway address 4 VoIPDB Address 0 0 0 0 Enter the VoIPDB IP Address This information can be located in PRG 10 12 09 SL2100 Network Setup IP Address 5 Extension Number 0 Assign the SIP Terminal extensio...

Page 523: ...oIPDB SIP can be configured to use any of the following voice compressions G 711 A law Highest Bandwidth G 729 a Most often used The LAN WAN or Internet connection is provided by a 10 Base T 100 Base TX Ethernet The SL2100 supports a maximum of six SIP Profiles allowing you to connect to a multiple of SIP Carriers and have different SIP System Interconnections at the same time Support 6 SIP profil...

Page 524: ... With the SIP Trunk E 164 CLIP Enhancement enabled when an incoming SIP call from an external ITSP is presented at the system with a in the From header field as the international access code it is recognized and displayed as an international call at the terminal display and also logged in the terminals incoming caller history allowing any outbound calls made from a multiline terminals caller histo...

Page 525: ... 12 03 must be able to route traffic to the carrier configured in Profile 1 and also be able to route traffic to the System Interconnection configured in Profile 2 SIP Multi Profile carrier configurations must be reachable through the same DNS server settings For SIP Multi Profile programming areas you will now require an index selection as to whether Profile 1 to Profile 6 is to be configured PRG...

Page 526: ...128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 05 CPU Network Setup NIC Interface 0 Auto Detect 1 100Mbps Full Duplex 2 100Mbps Half Duplex 3 10Mbps Full Duplex 4 10Mbps Half Duplex 0 10 12 07 CPU Network Setup NAPT Router IP Ad dress Default Gateway WAN 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 08 CPU Network Setup ICMP Redirect 0...

Page 527: ...t paging 8 Unicast paging Resource 1 128 0 10 23 01 SIP System Interconnection Setup System In terconnection 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 0 10 23 02 SIP System Interconnection Setup IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 23 04 SIP System Interconnection Setup Dial Number Up to 12 digits 0 9 No Setting 10 28 01 SIP System Information Setup Dom...

Page 528: ...r A 2 Carrier B 7 Carrier G 8 Carrier H 26 Carrier Z SIP Profile 1 6 0 10 29 15 SIP Server Information Setup Registration Expi ry Expire Time 120 65535 seconds SIP Profile 1 6 3600 10 29 16 SIP Server Information Setup Register Sub Mode 0 Off Allow invalid Invite mes sage 1 On Deny invalid Invite mes sage SIP Profile 1 6 0 10 29 20 SIP Server Information Setup Authentication Trial 0 9 SIP Profile ...

Page 529: ...tension Register ID None 0 31 SIP Profile 1 6 No Setting 21 17 01 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Calling Party Number Up to 16 digits 1 0 No Setting 21 19 01 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension Calling Party Number Up to 16 Digits 1 0 SIP Profile 1 6 No Setting 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Trunk Service Type 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS insta...

Page 530: ...ile 1 6 0 84 13 04 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer Minimum 0 300 ms SIP Profile 1 6 20 84 13 05 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer Minimum 0 300 ms SIP Profile 1 6 40 84 13 06 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer Maximum 0 300 ms SIP Profile 1 6 80 84 13 07 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Audio Frame 1 6 1 10...

Page 531: ...SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer Standard 0 300 ms SIP Profile 1 6 60 84 13 37 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer Maximum 0 300 ms SIP Profile 1 6 120 84 13 38 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 726 Audio Frame 1 10 ms 2 20 ms 3 30 ms 4 40 ms SIP Profile 1 6 3 84 13 39 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 726 Silence Compression Mode ...

Page 532: ...Information Setup SIP Trunk Port Number 1 65535 SIP Profile 1 6 Profile 1 5060 Profile 2 5062 Profile 3 5090 Profile 4 5092 Profile 5 5094 Profile 6 5696 84 14 07 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Session Timer Value 0 65535 SIP Profile 1 6 0 84 14 08 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Minimum Session Timer Value 0 65535 SIP Profile 1 6 1800 84 14 09 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Called Party I...

Page 533: ...o Detect Mode for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 1 84 31 03 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup TDM Echo Can celler ComfortNoise mode 0 Disable 1 Enable for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 1 84 31 05 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup TDM Echo Can celler Tail Displacement 0 89 0 ms 890 ms for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 0 84 31 06 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup TDM Echo can celler tail length 1 32 ms 2 48 ms 3 64 ms 4 80 ms 5 96 ms 6 112 m...

Page 534: ... Level Control Flag for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 0 84 31 17 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup TDM RX Level Control Level 0 16 24 dB 24 dB 0 24 dB 1 21 dB 8 0 dB 15 21 dB 16 24 dB for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 8 84 31 18 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup TDM RX Auto matic Level Control Level 0 12 42 dBm 6 dBm 0 42 dBm 1 39 dBm 7 21 dBm 11 9 dBm 12 6 dBm for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 7 84 38 01 VoIPDB Network Side Echo Ca...

Page 535: ... mode 3 HLC for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 0 84 38 11 VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceller Setup Tx Level Control Level 0 16 24 24 dB 0 24 dB 1 21 dB 2 18 dB 8 0 dB 14 18 dB 15 21 dB 16 24 dB for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 8 84 38 12 VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceller Setup Tx AutomaticLevelControl Level 0 12 42 dbm 6 dbm 0 42 dBm 1 39 dBm 7 21 dBm 11 9 dBm 12 6 dBm for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 7 84 38 13 VoIPDB...

Page 536: ...P Trunk Profile 1 6 8 84 38 18 VoIPDB Network Side Echo Canceller Setup Rx AutomaticLevelControl Level 0 12 42 dBm 6 dBm 0 42 dBm 1 39 dBm 7 21 dBm 11 9 dBm 12 6 dBm for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 7 84 31 37 VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup Echo Canceller NLP mode 4W 0 Disable 1 Enable for SIP Trunk Profile 1 6 1 90 10 01 System Alarm Setup Alarm type Refer to Programming Manual Operation SIP Trunk E 164 Su...

Page 537: ...441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Asserted Identity P Asserted Identity 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Preferred Identity P Preferred Identity 441509555123 172 16 0 10 No Setting Request URI Invite sip 00441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 00441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 44150...

Page 538: ...Displayed in terminal incoming caller history as 01 4902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL Original 01 004902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL PRG 10 02 01 0 01 02131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL PRG 10 02 01 49 Delete and replace the and matched country code from an incoming SIP INVITE using E 164 numbering scheme PRG 84 14 16 PRG 84 14 13 Description Comments 2 Mode 2 1 Mode 1 With a SIP INVITE for incoming...

Page 539: ...t key List 3 Press soft key CID 4 Press Speaker SIP Multi Carrier Support SIP Carrier and System Interconnection Example SIP Trunks are assigned to System A The number of ports available are 16 ports Profile 1 is port 1 8 Profile 2 is port 9 16 Profile 1 is connected to a SIP carrier Profile 2 is a SIP System Interconnection System B When the user in system A makes an outbound call the ARS service...

Page 540: ...cess 11 02 Extension Numbering Port 1 32 Extension Number 101 132 11 09 Trunk Access Code Trunk Access Code 0 26 01 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS Service 1 Enable 26 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR Table 1 Dial 050 Service Type 1 TRG Additional Data 3 Table 2 Dial 2 Service Type 1 TRG Additional Data 5 Table 1 42 IP Trunks PRG Name Data 10 23 IP System Interconnection Setup System No 1 ...

Page 541: ...Port 1 8 SIP Profile 1 Profile 1 Port 9 16 SIP Profile 2 Profile 2 22 02 Incoming Service Type Setup Port 1 8 Day Night Mode 1 8 Service Type 3 DID Port 9 16 Day Night Mode 1 8 Service Type 5 Tie Line 84 14 06 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup SIP Profile 1 SIP Trunk Port Number 5060 SIP Profile 2 SIP Trunk Port Number 5062 System B Configuration Table 1 43 IP Settings PRG Name Data 10 12 CCPU Net...

Page 542: ...IP Trunk Availability Index 1 Trunk Type 1 SIP Start Port 1 Number of Ports 8 14 05 Trunk Group Port 1 8 Group 5 14 18 05 IP Trunk Data Setup Port 1 8 SIP Profile 1 Profile 1 22 02 Incoming Service Type Setup Port 1 8 Day Night Mode 1 8 Service Type 5 Tie Line 84 14 06 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup SIP Profile 1 SIP Trunk Port Number 5062 Operation 1 TEL 101 makes outbound call to SIP carrier ...

Page 543: ...rrier No Operation LED Tone LCD 123456789012345678901234 Note 1 Off Hook NT Clock Calendar 2 Dial 0 2 LK09 G ON NT Line 009 2 Soft key 3 Dial 01 LK09 G ON RBT Line 009 201 Soft key ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 529 I ...

Page 544: ...ation and Authentication Server RAS support to register with an RAS Server and use Gatekeeper for dynamic call routing The VoIPDB H 323 is an optional interface that can provide IP trunks and Tie Lines It can operate in the following modes COI COID DID TLI DTI Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN WAN Internet the VoIPDB H 323 can be configured to use any of the followin...

Page 545: ... 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 Refer to the program ming manual for all the possible valid subnet mask entries default 255 255 0 0 10 17 02 H 323 Gatekeeper Setup Gatekeeper IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 17 04 H 323 Gatekeeper Setup Preferred Gatekeeper Maximum 124 characters No Setting 10 18 01 H 323 Alias Address Setup Ali...

Page 546: ... DDI Mode Switching 0 44 02 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Di al Up to eight digits Use line key 1 for a Don t Care digit No Setting 44 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Service Type 0 No setting None 1 Extension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Option 0 44 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Additional Data 1 Delete Dig...

Page 547: ... 06 FAX over IP Setup T 38 FAX Max Speed 1 V 27ter 4800 bps 2 V 29 9600 bps 2 84 33 08 FAX over IP Setup T 38 Error protection depth for Signaling 0 2 0 84 33 09 FAX over IP Setup T 38 Error protection depth for Data 0 2 0 84 33 10 FAX over IP Setup TCF Operation Setting 1 Training signal TCF of the fax is locally generated and checked 2 Training signal TCF of the fax is sent over the network 1 84...

Page 548: ...esentation from Station Calling Party Number CPN Presentation from Station allows each unique station or virtual extension 10 digit number representing the DID number of the originating station to be sent out over the ISDN Network if it is programmed If there is no Extension Calling Number assigned the system will send the calling number for the ISDN trunk If both the extension and trunk informati...

Page 549: ...has the number of ports changed the Trunk Port number might change if they become split or fit into an empty gap of trunk ports If using a CSU DSU PRG 10 03 13 must be set to 0 If not using a CSU DSU PRG 10 03 13 must be set to 1 7 or anything other than 0 Restrictions for Calling Party Name The SL2100 supports receiving the name from the Network in supported formats only and cannot send the Calli...

Page 550: ... Talking on TK009 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 23 Incoming call from the Network on Channel 23 In most cases the Network will control select the B Channel used for an incoming call Outgoing Call Trunk Number Trunk Group Trunk Priority B Channel Number 9 1 9 1 10 1 8 2 11 1 7 3 12 1 6 4 13 1 5 5 14 1 4 6 15 1 3 7 16 1 2 8 17 1 1 9 18 2 3 10 19 2 2 11 ...

Page 551: ...he installation of NT1 Network Terminators and interconnecting cabling CO Line Service is not supported ISDN BRI cannot be configured for CO Emulation BRI and DID Callers with Non Matching SPID Numbers This feature allows you to determine whether the system checks the called party number with the SETUP message and the SPID setup Depending on the system programming this can allow DID calls to be re...

Page 552: ...ut Data Default 10 03 01 ETU Setup BRIA PKG ISDN Line Mode 0 No Setting 1 T Point 2 S Point 3 5 Not Used 6 S Point Leased Line 1 10 03 03 ETU Setup BRIA PKG Setup Connection Type 0 Point to Multipoint 1 Point to Point 0 10 03 04 ETU Setup BRIA PKG Setup Layer 3 Timer Type 1 5 1 10 03 08 ETU Setup BRIA PKG Setup Dial Sending Mode 0 Enblock Sending 1 Overlap Sending 1 10 03 09 ETU Setup BRIA PKG Set...

Page 553: ...ng plan 5 Private numbering plan 0 10 03 20 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Setup Network Ex change Selection 0 Standard 3 DMS A211 4 5ESS 5 DMS A233 6 4ESS 7 NI2 0 10 03 21 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Setup PRI Number of Ports 0 Auto 1 4 Ports 2 8 Ports 3 12 Ports 4 16 Ports 5 20 Ports 0 10 39 01 Fractional Setup Fractional 0 Disable when disabled the system will assign the PRI as a full PRI trunks 1 Enable when enabl...

Page 554: ...CPN is NOT sent 1 Enabled CPN is sent 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 08 13 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Set Calling Party Number 0 Off when set to Off the sys tem will not send any outbound calling party information 1 On when set to ON the sys tem will send calling party...

Page 555: ...am Name Input Data Default 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Trans fer 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 15 02 29 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup PB Back Tone Level 1 63 15 5 dB 15 5 dB 32 0 dB 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of...

Page 556: ...nd 0 Off 1 On 0 20 07 26 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Dial In Mode Switch 0 Off Station cannot control DDI switching 1 On Station can control DDI switching COS 1 15 1 22 13 01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assign ment Translation Table 0 20 0 No Setting 1 22 17 04 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Dial In Conversion Table Number 1 1000 These are the table ...

Page 557: ...Facility 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element In PRG 14 05 01 assign PRI lines to trunk groups determines available channels for PRI lines In PRG 21 01 03 enter the interval for the trunk interdigit timer Is the amount of time the system waits before placing the call in a talk state sufficient Go To A In PRG 20 19 04 set the timer to 0 PRG 20 19 04 set the timer to at least ...

Page 558: ...ame In PRG 35 02 16 enter 0 to print the trunk port name assigned in PRG 14 01 01 or enter 1 to print the received dialed number In PRG 22 02 01 enter 0 Should all PRI Trunks ring the same extensions In PRG 22 02 01 enter 3 Refer to the Programming Manual or Networking Manual In PRG 22 05 01 assign all the trunks on a PRI ETU to the same Ring Group In PRG 14 07 01 and PRG 15 06 01 set up the trunk...

Page 559: ...o a unique alarm sound In PRG 22 01 02 Enter 1 Also set the interval in PRG 22 01 03 Do you want to change the way PRI calls ring telephones Change the Ring Tone Range in PRG 22 03 01 and PRG 15 02 02 the tones within each range in PRG 82 01 01 and the ring cadence in PRG 20 15 01 Adjust the CODEC Gain in PRG 14 01 02 transmit and PRG 14 01 03 receive Trunks Do you want to adjust the gain volume f...

Page 560: ...1 Enblock Overlap In PRG 10 03 09 select either Keypad Facility 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element PRG 20 08 02 enter 1 to enable outgoing calls Should system users be able to place outgoing calls on trunks In PRG 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions In PRG 20 08 02 enter 0 to disable outgoing calls In PRG 20 08 01 ebter 0 to disable calling number display by Tel...

Page 561: ...7 enter 1 to allow outgoing calls In PRG 14 05 01 assign PRI trunks to trunk groups This determines available channels for PRI trunks Do you need to restrict certain extensions from placing calls on certain trunks In the default program extensions Build an out going restriction matrix In PRG 14 07 01 for each Access Map select the access options for each trunk In PRG 15 06 01 assign extensions to ...

Page 562: ...temate Trunk Route Access Is Trunk Group Routing defined In PRG 11 01 01 set up a Service Code for Altemate Trunk Route Access For example to make 50 the Altemate Trunk Route Access Code DIAL 5 Digit 2 Kind 8 In PRG 21 15 01 enter the extension number and enter 0 to prevent routing In PRG 15 07 01 do not assign function key as line keys In PRG 21 01 03 enter the interval for the trunk interdigit t...

Page 563: ...k base settings PRG 14 01 46 extension base settings are not usable Collect call via DIL DID TIE allows both trunk base and extension base settings To enable Collect Call Blocking both settings have to set On Collect call via a normal incoming call allows both trunk base and extension base settings If one extension in a ring group is set for Collect Call Blocking this feature works for all extensi...

Page 564: ... No Program Name Input Data Default 20 09 09 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Deny Collect Call Receiving 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 550 ISDN Compatibility Collect Call Blocking I ...

Page 565: ...the number displayed or enter a System Speed Dialing bin number to be dialed Pressing the Redial key repeatedly will scroll through the last 10 numbers dialed Cursor Key Operation In a case of standard mode PRG 15 02 60 is set 0 by pressing the Left Cursor key the user can access the Redial and Incoming Call History menus The flow chart below shows the menu access sequence If the terminal is not a...

Page 566: ...ion Trunk Mode 1 Trunk Mode 0 20 08 05 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Dial Number Preview Preset Dial 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 Operation To redial your last call When set PRG 15 02 60 0 1 Without lifting the handset press the Redial key The last dialed number is displayed 2 To redial the last number dial OR Search for the desired number from the Redial List by pressing the Redial or ...

Page 567: ... key or lift handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 To Clear all the stored number dial 776 To redial the last number you can do the following When set PRG 15 02 60 1 or 2 1 Press the Right Cursor key once and the Up or Down Cursor key to find number 2 After the number been selected you can make a call by following ways Press Speaker key Lift the Handset Press the Right Cursor k...

Page 568: ...ce The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset or Press Speaker key 2 Press Exit key To erase the stored number 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or lift handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 To clear all stored number dial 776 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 554 Last Number Redial L ...

Page 569: ...o an indirect carrier you must confirm that they will accept this type of call It is normal practice to have an override code that the users can dial to route the call to a chosen carrier direct or indirect in the event of faults with the carrier F Route ARS operation takes place on the digits dialled by the user before the trunk is seized LCR will use the digits sent to line i e after translation...

Page 570: ...e Exemption Table Exemp tion Number Maximum 4 digits 0 9 Do not include the Access Code Table 1 000 Table 2 25 No Set ting Note 1 Change to DTMF Operation In PRG 26 05 02 the symbol will have different operation for Analogue trunks or ISDN trunks Analogue Trunks At the point in the dialled digits where the appears the SL2100 will revert to DTMF dialling This is only required when the analogue trun...

Page 571: ...Operation LCR Operation Flow Diagram ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 557 L ...

Page 572: ...LCR Dial LCR Dial Editing SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 558 LCR Least Cost Routing L ...

Page 573: ...LCR Cost Center Code ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 559 L ...

Page 574: ...dvance InMail Advanced Features License E Mail Notification Cascading message notification Find Me Follow Me Password option Hotel Motel Applications Desktop Application Softphone This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can be used for Softphone Desktop Client This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can be run 60 Day Free License The 60 Day Free License comes with the C...

Page 575: ...nse Information License Name Read Only Character None 10 50 02 License Information License Quantity Read Only 0 32767 None 10 50 03 License Information Campaign License Quanti ty Read Only 0 32767 None 10 50 04 License Information Campaign License Re maining Days Read Only 0 9999 None 10 52 01 Free Demo License Information Remaining days of Free Demo License Read Only 0 9999 None 90 55 01 Free Lic...

Page 576: ...nUC Web Client Li cense with call control Call Control is up to 112 Port Base 0 128 0080 SL2100 WEB VID EO CNF 01 LIC Web Video Conference License for InUC Web Client Session Base 1 28 5301 5303 SL2100 SOFT PHONE 01 LIC Softphone License for UC Suite user base 1 112 3512 SL2100 INGUARD LIC Toll Fraud Guard Li cense System Base On Off 3513 SL2100 LUA PMS LIC PMS API Converter Li cense System Base O...

Page 577: ... File 6 Select the location of the license file to upload Auto Register the License for the System 1 Connect to the system 2 Go to the Feature Activation screen 3 Enter email Address and Password 4 Add Software Key code s If left blank it registers all attached licenses for the Hardware Key code 5 Click on Auto Register ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 563 L ...

Page 578: ...reference the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference The user hears either trunk dial 0 or Intercom dial tone Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines With Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions not their own This would hel...

Page 579: ...s signed with option 7 ac cess incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 01 02 Basic Extension Data Setup Outgoing Trunk Line Preference 0 Off 1 On 0 15 02 10 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls 0 Idle Off 1 Ringing On 1 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Trunk Ac cess Map Number 001 128 1 20 10 07 Class of Service Options Answe...

Page 580: ...n Ringing Trunk or intercom ICM call Lift the handset or press Speaker key The setting assigned for PRG 15 02 10 and PRG 22 01 01 determines which call is answered first SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 566 Line Preference L ...

Page 581: ...Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features C...

Page 582: ...Extension are Class 1 20 13 02 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 03 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 21 03 System Options for Long Conversation Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call 0 64800 seconds 0 20 21 04 System Options for Long Conversati...

Page 583: ...th Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop keys Both Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and don t separate keys for incoming and outgoing calls Both Ways loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls An extension can have many loop keys of any type You can program an operator for example with four loop keys for incoming calls and four for outgoing cal...

Page 584: ... PRG 22 05 Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Transferred DID DIL and DISA calls do not require ring group programming Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Port 1 128 Priority 1 128 Trunk Group number 0 50 Refer to Programming Manual 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Access...

Page 585: ...Administrator Level Programmable Function Key Programming Ap pearance Level 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Extension Number Maximum eight Digits Group01 has 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 and 108 First 8 ports ringing 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment In coming Group Number 0 No Setting 01 50 Incoming Group 102 VMI 103 Centralized VM 1 Operation T...

Page 586: ...oop key routing option for incoming outgoing or incoming and outgoing calls 000 Trunk Group Routing or ARS if installed 001 050 Trunk Groups If you selected option 2 in step 5 above enter the incoming Trunk Group followed by the outgoing Trunk Group 7 Press Speaker key to hang up SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 572 Loop Keys L ...

Page 587: ...can display alarm data If need be an option in PCPro allows the technician to reset or initialize the system remotely If the technician determines the problem is isolated to a specific slot PCPro can reset only the slot in question Quick System Check up You can check the System Information VoIPDB Information and IP Address by doing a simple operation Here are the information you can get from the o...

Page 588: ... An swer 3 Call Forwarding All Call No Setting 93 03 02 Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer 0 9 P R Up to 36 digits No Setting 93 03 03 Call Forward Busy 0 Call Forward Off 1 Call Forward Busy or No an swer 2 Call Forward Busy No Setting 93 03 04 Call Forwarding Busy destination 0 9 P R Up to 36 digits No Setting 93 03 05 Call Forwarding Follow Me 0 Disable 1 Enable No Set...

Page 589: ...0 Disable 1 Enable No Setting 93 03 19 Headset Mode Switching 0 Disable 1 Enable No Setting 93 03 20 Headset Ringing Mode Switching 0 Disable 1 Enable No Setting 93 04 01 Redial Data Dial Data 1 9 0 P R Up to 36 digits No Setting 93 04 02 Name Up to 12 characters No Setting 93 05 01 Set Automatic transfer at Department Group call 0 Disable 1 Enable No Setting 93 05 02 Set Delayed transfer at Depar...

Page 590: ...ment screen and Click System Alarm at the left side menu 3 Display shows System Alarm screen The system alarm can be displayed up to 100 alarm reports Web Pro does not support an alarm report output The user level for which this function can be used is the following 2 IN Installer Level Figure 1 29 Sample Image SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 576 Maintenance M ...

Page 591: ...llowing 2 IN Installer Level Figure 1 30 Sample Image Conditions Side Tone Auto Setup The system needs to be idle for the Side Tone Auto Setup to be used When measured trunk is busy disconnected outgoing call restricted or selected trunk is not analog trunk ERROR will be displayed on the LCD of the programming terminal Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals None Required Component ...

Page 592: ...Type 0 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 6 Type 6 7 Type 7 8 Type 8 9 Type 9 10 Type 10 11 Type 11 12 Type 12 13 Type 13 14 Type 14 15 Type 15 7 90 68 01 Side Tone Auto Setup Adjustment Start Trunk Port Number 001 128 No Setting 90 68 02 Side Tone Auto Setup 1 digit data Dial 1 dight 0 Operation None SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 578 Maintenance M ...

Page 593: ...d date and time to update the software Manual Software Update Manual Update Network Download The SL2100 checks the update information from the maintenance server when a user initiates the update process manually If the SL2100 detects a newer software other than the installed the SL2100 starts downloading the software After downloading the SL2100 reboots immediately or at scheduled date and time as...

Page 594: ... 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 10 12 03 CPU Network Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 CPU Network Setup IP Address VoIPDB 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask VoIPDB 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0...

Page 595: ...etting Manual Update 0 Disable 1 Enable Disable 90 36 09 Software Update Time Setting Month 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December January 90 36 10 Software Update Time Setting Day 1 31 1 90 36 12 Software Update Time Setting Hour 0 23 0 90 36 13 Software Update Time Setting Minute 0 59 0 90 36 14 Software Update Time Settin...

Page 596: ...s shown in figure This is system specific and fixed SL2100 checks the software update to the server at 2 33 AM on the 8th of each month After checking if a newer software is available on the server then a message There is newer version available is displayed on Home and Software update page as shown in figure If the installed software is latest then following message is displayed on the software u...

Page 597: ...45 AM on Monday to update the software After doing settings on software update page click on Save button The SL2100 starts downloading the software at 2 33AM of 8th of each month if a newer software is available After downloading the software webpro displays a message The update software is ready as shown in figure User can cancel the update by pressing the Cancel Update button The SL2100 will reb...

Page 598: ...t Network Download with either Immediately Reset or Schedule Reset Select either Immediately Reset or Schedule Reset Click on Start Do these settings in case of Schedule Reset Select Network Download SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 584 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 599: ...w appears Click on Ok button to proceed On clicking OK the SL2100 checks for update and following window is displayed If current software is latest then following window is displayed ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 585 M ...

Page 600: ...on the server then the SL2100 starts downloading the new software from the server and Proceeding is displayed on software update page and the page refreshes every 10 seconds SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 586 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 601: ...ing the firmware downloading the SL2100 reboots as per setting either Immediately or scheduled In case of Scheduled Reset the following window is displayed ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 587 M ...

Page 602: ...sage The update software is ready as shown in figure User can cancel the update by pressing the Cancel Update button Cancel Schedule Reset With Schedule Reset if Cancel button is pressed then schedule reset is cancelled SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 588 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 603: ...After pressing the cancel button following window is displayed ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 589 M ...

Page 604: ...On pressing OK the Cancel button is disabled as follows SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 590 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 605: ...Now Schedule Reset is cancelled and on Home Page The following window is displayed where Manual Reset time is removed now ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 591 M ...

Page 606: ...hedule Reset Select either Immediately Reset or Schedule Reset Browse and select the bin file of software to be uploaded Do these settings in case of Scheduled Reset Select Upload from PC Click on Start On clicking Start button following window is displayed Click on OK button to proceed SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 592 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 607: ...d following window is displayed After completing the software uploading following window is displayed In case of Immediately Reset the SL2100 reboots immediately and software is updated ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 593 M ...

Page 608: ...lays a message The update software is ready on home page User can cancel the update by pressing Cancel Update Button Cancel Schedule reset upload from PC In case of Scheduled Reset system reboots at defined time but if Cancel button is pressed then scheduled reset is cancelled SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 594 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 609: ...After pressing the cancel button following window is displayed ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 595 M ...

Page 610: ...On pressing OK the Cancel button will be disabled as shown in figure SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 596 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 611: ...enu Maintenance Zone select the Upgrade SW option 5 In the firmware update window browse and select the Firmware Package file For example the file name might be MainSWv0 36 bin 6 Select the schedule Update Immediately after upload At the time If you select At the time select the date and time at which you want SL2100 system to reset and switch over to the new software version ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Feat...

Page 612: ...mediately or at scheduled time as per config uration Browse and select the bin software file Select the Immediate or schedule reset Click on Run If Schedule reset is selected then define the Date and time When System resets PCPro will automatically disconnect SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 598 Maintenance Automatic System Update M ...

Page 613: ...cuits allowing each block to have any number of internal or external parties conferenced up to the block limit of 16 Conditions None Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Conference Meet Me Paging Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 15 07 01 Programmable Fu...

Page 614: ...7 2 Dial Paging code External 703 or Combined 1 and the Paging Zone 3 Announce the zone 4 When a co worker answers your page press the Conf softkey or press Conf key PRG15 07 or SC 751 07 twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add Single Line Terminal 1 While on a call hookflash and dial 1 2 Dial Paging code Internal 701 External 703 or Combined 1 and the Paging Zone 3 Announce th...

Page 615: ...mbined 1 and the Paging Zone 3 Announce the zone 4 When a co worker answers your page press hookflash twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To join a Meet Me Internal Conference 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or lift the handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if ...

Page 616: ...in in the conversation Conditions With Meet Me Paging Transfer a user can page a co worker and have the call automatically transfer when the co worker answers the page An extension access to internal and external page zones affects the Meet Me Paging feature Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging operation Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals Multiline Terminal...

Page 617: ...1 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number 0 50 0 No setting All stations 1 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving 0 Off 1 On 1 For additional programming information on Paging refer to Paging External on page 1 677 and Paging Internal on page 1 683 features Operation Meet Me External Page To make a Meet Me External Page 1 At Multili...

Page 618: ...unce the zone To join a Meet Me Internal Page 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or pick up the handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 751 23 if your extension is in the zone c...

Page 619: ...call and up to 31 other inside parties An extension user can Page a co worker and meet with them on a page zone With External Paging an extension user can broadcast an announcement over paging equipment connected to external paging zones Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other Multiline Terminals Function keys simplify Meet Me Paging Transfer operation Default Setting...

Page 620: ... No setting All stations 1 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving 0 Off 1 On 1 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values For additional programming information on Paging refer to the Paging External on page 1 677 and Paging Internal on page 1 683 features Opera...

Page 621: ...nal when the paged party answers press Transfer key OR From a Single Line Terminal when the paged party answers hang up The party is transferred To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or pick up handset OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extensio...

Page 622: ...al digits does not interfere with a call in progress Conditions When Memo Dial calls out it outdials the entire stored number Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number Only one number can be stored at a time If a number is already stored in Memo Dial and you are on an internal or external call and the Dial Memo Key is pressed the n...

Page 623: ...ontinue with conversation To call a stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Memo Dial key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 31 3 Press Speaker key The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number OR Press the line key The stored number dials out To check to see the stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Memo Dial key PRG 15 07 or SC...

Page 624: ... set to flash green Conditions When a user responds to a Message Waiting the system does not cancel the Message Waiting LED if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback The system cancels the indication only if the called party lifts the handset or presses Speaker key With the Hotel Motel set up an employee with a Multiline Terminal can send a Message Waiting to a room telephone if allowed in sys...

Page 625: ...ting 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 773 11 11 11 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Cancel Message Waiting 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 771 11 16 07 Single Digit Service Code Setup Message Wait ing 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 15 02 28 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Color 0 Green 1 Red 0 15 02 35 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Callin...

Page 626: ...ge Indication Tone 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 0 80 01 02 48 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 0 Operation To leave a Message Waiting 1 Call busy or unanswered extension 2 Press the Message Waiting key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 38 3 Hang up With Multiline Terminal telephones the Message Waiting LED lights To answer a Message Waiting When you have a message ...

Page 627: ...es Waiting you have left at a specific extension 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 771 3 Dial the number of the extension you do not want to have your messages 4 Hang up To check your messages 1 Press Help key 2 Dial 0 You can have any combination of the message types in the following table on your telephone If you see You have VOI...

Page 628: ...the Handsfree On Hook Mute key turns off handsfree microphone When using the Handset Off Hook Mute key turns off Handset microphone When using the Headset Mute key turns off Headset microphone Default Settings Enabled using Mute key System Availability Terminals Any Multiline Terminal Required Component s None Related Features Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Handset Mute Handset Cutof...

Page 629: ...0 02 11 System Options for Multiline Telephones Handsfree Microphone Control 0 Off 1 On 1 Operation To mute your telephone handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call 1 Press Mute key To turn your telephone microphone back on 1 Press Mute key Use Mute key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 615 M ...

Page 630: ...DN PRI trunks or SIP trunks It is recommended to use this feature with an ISDN PCB PRI or BRI however analog trunks can be used as well To provide a proper disconnect Disconnect Supervision is required for the trunks used for this feature The Mobile extension internal extension number Proxy Port is linked to a speed dial bin to provide integration If all external trunks are busy when a call is mad...

Page 631: ...Codes Type Incoming Feature Program Code Set By Mobile Extension Set to Mobile Extension Night Mode Switching 11 10 01 718 Yes Night Mode Switching for Other Group 11 10 12 618 Yes Call Forward All 11 11 01 741 Yes Yes Call Forward Busy 11 11 02 742 Yes Yes Call Forward No Answer 11 11 03 743 Yes Yes Call Forward Busy No Answer 11 11 04 744 Yes Yes Call Forward Both Ring 11 11 05 745 Yes Yes Call ...

Page 632: ... 23 763 Yes Yes Combined Paging 11 12 24 1 Yes Direct Call Pickup Own Group 11 12 25 756 Yes Yes Call Pickup for Specified Group 11 12 26 768 Yes Yes Call Pickup 11 12 27 Yes Yes Call Pickup for Another Group 11 12 28 769 Yes Yes Direct Extension Call Pickup 11 12 29 Yes Park Hold 11 12 31 6 Yes Answer for Park Hold 11 12 32 6 Yes Group Hold 11 12 33 732 Yes Answer for Group Hold 11 12 34 762 Yes ...

Page 633: ...es Although some features may be available to the Mobile Extension it may be advisable to disable them in Class of Service There are also features that should be disabled in any case The features to be disabled not used for Mobile Extension include ACD TAPI Analog Trunks Port Swap Hotline General Message Message Waiting Headset Mode for SLT Flexible Transfer Virtual Loop Back Tandem Ringing Virtua...

Page 634: ...ile Extension to dial into the system to access features For the extension DTMF the minimum Detect Level for the DTMF Tone PRG 80 03 03 must be set to allow a minimum detection level of 25dBm This entry is dependent on the Detect Level selected in PRG 80 03 01 The Mobile Extension uses the to perform a flash so any service codes which begin with must be changed PRG 11 10 PRG 11 11 PRG 11 12 PRG 11...

Page 635: ...e enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Extension Number Dial Up to 8 digits Extension Port Num ber Extension Number 001 064 101 164 065 128 No Setting 11 13 Service Code Setup for ACD Refer to Programming Manual 14 01 24 Trunk to Trunk Outgoing Caller ID through Mode 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 15 22 01 Mobile Extension Setup Mobile Extension Tar get Setu...

Page 636: ... 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 04 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 05 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Fo...

Page 637: ...eat Count 0 255 0 Endless Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 03 03 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Min Detect Level 0 15 DTMF Tone 0 10 dBm 0 to 25 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 1 15 dBm 0 to 30 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 2 20 dBm 0 to 35 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 3 25 dBm 0 to 40 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 4 30 dBm 0 to 45 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 5 35 dBm 0 to 50 dBm 15 DTMF Tone 6 40 dBm 0 to 55 dBm 15 Refer to the Program min...

Page 638: ...nsion voice mail if available Outside Party Dialing the Mobile Extension 1 Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension 2 System programming DID 22 11 01 or DIL 22 07 01 must be defined If the Mobile Extension is turned off incoming callers hear a message indicating the user is not available The setting in the DTMF Confirmation programming PRG 15 22 02 determines how the call is h...

Page 639: ...e extension number to which the call is to be transferred 3 Dial 0 4 Hang up Call Forwarding When setting Call Forwarding from the Mobile Extension the service code s must be redefined in PRG 11 10 18 PRG 11 11 06 and PRG 11 11 40 and also must be defined in PRG 11 11 01 PRG 11 11 05 and PRG 11 11 07 To activate or cancel Call Forwarding to from the Mobile Extension 1 When activating Call Forwardi...

Page 640: ... the destination extension 5 Dial 0 from Mobil Extension only 6 Hang up To cancel Call Forward Follow Me 1 When activating Call Forwarding From the Mobile Extension Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry PRG 13 04 and PRG 15 22 internal dial tone is heard by the Mobile Extension user OR When activating...

Page 641: ...as a normal Mobile Extension call Callback to Mobile Phone will not proceed and no retry is made if all trunks are busy when trying to callback Callback trunk routing follows PRG 15 22 03 setting When set 0 Normal trunk access code ARS also can be used If Mobile Extension does not answer the Callback within time set in PRG 20 01 16 Callback will stop If answered the within the Callback time the us...

Page 642: ... No Mobile Extensions are configured System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Caller ID Call Forwarding Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Station Message Detail Recording Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Number Maximum o...

Page 643: ...nable Yes 0 14 01 30 Basic Trunk Data Setup Flexible Ringing by Caller ID 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 15 22 01 Mobile Extension Setup Mobile Extension Tar get Setup 0 No Setting 1 999 Speed Dial Bin 1 999 PRG 13 04 0 15 22 03 Mobile Extension Setup Trunk Access Code 0 Normal Trunk Access PRG 11 09 01 1 Individual Trunk Access PRG 11 09 02 0 15 22 04 Mobile Extension Setup Call Back 0 Disable 1 Ena...

Page 644: ... and dials before 30 seconds Receive call from Mobile Extension but system answered 1 Call the system Trk1 from the cell phone setting as a mobile extension Ex 150 2 Mobile Phone user continues ring for longer than 3 seconds then system answers 3 Mobile Phone user hears a dial tone Mobile Phone does not answer to Callback 1 Call the system Trk1 from the Mobile Phone setting as a mobile extension E...

Page 645: ...I Refer to the ISDN Compatibility on page 1 534 feature for related information T1 E1 Trunks The 1PRIDB C1 daughter board gives the system T1 E1 trunking ability This board provides up to 24 30 trunk circuits In additional to providing digital quality trunking the 1PRIDB C1 daughter board allows you to have maximum trunking ability with fewer boards This in turn makes more universal slots availabl...

Page 646: ... Time 0 64800 seconds 10 seconds 34 01 02 E M Tie Line Basic Setup Receive Dial Type for E M Tie Line 0 DP 1 DTMF 1 Loop Start Trunks Program No Program Name Input Data Default 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup Type of Connection 0 Stand Alone Trunk 1 Behind PBX PBX 3 CTX assume 9 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Group Number 0 50 Trunk Port 1 128 Priority 1 128 Refer to Programming Manual ...

Page 647: ...on number For an example if you make a Multi Device Group including the pilot extension 100 the member extensions 101 and 102 when there is an incoming call for the pilot extension 100 all terminals of the group will ring at the same time Any of the three extensions can be used to answer the incoming call When the call is answered all three extensions stop ringing A Multi Device Group key 14 can b...

Page 648: ... ISDN and 21 19 for SIP Trunks Conditions When a Member or Pilot Extension of the Multi Device Group is busy all members of the group will be in a busy state and cannot make or receive calls except for Emergency calls to 911 When a member of the Multi Device Group makes a 911 call the Multi Device key is disabled and they will be removed from the group until the Multi Device Key 14 is enabled agai...

Page 649: ...d to the Multi Device Group via system programming using Program 20 63 the UC Client must be restarted to apply these changes The number of external numbers available in the Multi Device Group is directly related to the number of Mobile Extensions defined in the group Program 20 63 If the user requires additional external numbers more mobile extensions need to also be added to the group using Prog...

Page 650: ...triction Dial Block Yes Yes Computer Telephony Integration CTI Applica tions No No Conference Calls Yes Yes Only one terminal from Multi Device Group can be in conference Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Yes No Contact Center No No Cordless Telephone Connection Yes Yes Data Line Security No No Delayed Ringing Yes Yes Regardless of setting in Program 15 09 VE will only flash and not audibly ri...

Page 651: ...t Operation Yes Yes Hold Yes Yes Hotel Motel No No Hotline Yes Yes Howler Tone Service Yes Yes Intercom Yes Yes IP Multiline Station SIP Yes Yes IP Multiline Station SIP ML440 Cordless Yes Yes IP Multiline Telephone Yes Yes IP Single Line Telephone SIP Yes Yes IP Single Line Telephone SIP NAT Mode Yes Yes IP Trunk H 323 Yes Yes IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol Yes Yes Calling Party Number ...

Page 652: ...ff Premise Extension No No One Touch Calling Yes Yes Operator No No Paging External Yes Yes A Multi Device Group Pilot and Member can only initiate an External or All Call Page It can not receive either Internal or All Call pages or display page information Paging Internal Yes Yes A Multi Device Group Pilot and Member can only initiate an Internal or All Call Page It can not receive either Interna...

Page 653: ...nce Yes Yes A member of MDG can initiate an unsuper vised conference Multiple members of MDG can not be in conference TAPI Compatibility No No Tone Override No No Transfer Yes Yes Unsupervised Transfer to Multi Device Group Members is not supported Trunk Groups Yes Yes Trunk Group Routing Yes Yes Trunk Queuing Camp On No No UC Suite Yes Yes Uniform Call Distribution UCD No No User Programming Abil...

Page 654: ... Setting 20 63 01 Multi Device Group Setup Pilot Extension Number Maximum of eight digits Group 1 50 No Setting 20 63 02 Multi Device Group Setup Member Extension Number 1 Maximum of eight digits Group 1 50 No Setting 20 63 03 Multi Device Group Setup Member Extension Number 2 Maximum of eight digits Group 1 50 No Setting 20 63 04 Multi Device Group Setup Member Extension Number 3 Maximum of eight...

Page 655: ... Device Support ON service code PRG11 11 75 No Setting default The Multi Device Group key will light red and the display will show MDG Pilot or MDG Member To Disable Multi Device Group 1 Press the Multi Device Group key 751 14 The Multi Device Group key will go out OR Press the Speaker Key or lift the Hand Set and dial the Multi Device Support Off service code PRG11 11 76 No Setting default The Mu...

Page 656: ...usic on Hold Source There are 4 options available PRG 10 04 01 PRG 10 04 02 Internal Music Tune The tune is fixed by one music tune External Source ACI Input via Audio Input connector RL Audio on the 082U B1 board PRG 10 60 02 Service Tone Callers on hold hear Service Tone Hold Message VRS Program 10 04 01 Music on Hold per DID DDI Number The music on hold source can be selected for individual DID...

Page 657: ...dicates a program that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 10 04 01 Music On Hold Setup Music on Hold Source Se lection 0 Internal MOH Tone is fixed by one music tone 1 External MOH Tone set by PRG 10 60 01 Audio Port No 2 2 Service Tone Tone set by PRG 80 01 tone 64 3 VRS Tone set by PRG 10 04 02 0 10 04 02 Music On Hold Setup...

Page 658: ...one Setup Duration Count 0 255 0 50 12750 ms Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 01 04 Service Tone Setup Gain Level dB 0 57 0 15 5 12 5 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 07 02 Class of Service Options Administrator...

Page 659: ...ed These characters are available with any option which allows Name Storing Speed Dial System Group Station One Touch Keys Extension Name Trunk Naming Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing Single line extensions cannot program names If a name is not assigned to the Extension Virtual Extension it does not show in the Extension Directory Extension Directory only sho...

Page 660: ...tions Supplementary Serv ice Number and Name appear in the Directory 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 Operation Refer to Table 1 52 Keys for Entering Names on page 1 646 for and explanation for using the keypad to enter names Table 1 52 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Ent...

Page 661: ... Outgoing call History Navigation mode 2 Advanced mode 2 None Directory Di aling DSX Incoming call History Outgoing call History Soft Key mode DSX 2W Digital IP Multiline Ter minal During entering one of above features if PRG 15 02 60 is changed to other mode it is necessary to make the terminal back to idle state before using new feature Warning Tone and Confirming Tone can be heard by setup of P...

Page 662: ...ltiple persons save the data at the same time same vacant bin number is used so last saved data will be valid Pressing the Center Cursor key during terminal is idle user can enter Navigation mode If the terminal has incoming call or ICM Hold it can not enter the mode When set in Advanced mode 1 or 2 even terminal idle BGM volume will not change by up down cursor key To change BGM volume it needs t...

Page 663: ... No Answer 426 Follow Me 500 Phone Setting 800 Properties 520 Display 521 Contrast 522 Minimume Brightness 523 Maximume Brightness 820 System 525 Auto Backlight 524 Backlight Threshold 530 Ring Options 531 Ringing Voice Call 532 Ringing Volume 533 Ring Tones 540 Key Touch Tone 550 Headset 551 Headset Ringing Volume 560 Key Assignment 600 System Setting 610 System Time 620 System Date 630 Manage Me...

Page 664: ...k 222 Save Common Phonbook 223 Save Group Phonbook 230 Edit Contact 231 Name started from A 232 Name started from B 23 Name started from J 400 User Features 410 Call Voice Mail 420 Call Forward 421 All Calls 422 Both Ring 423 Busy 424 No Answer 425 Busy No Answer 426 Follow Me 430 Paging 431 Internal Zone 432 External Zone 440 Dept Grp login out 441 Join 442 Withdraw 500 Phone Setting 520 Display ...

Page 665: ...al only 1st name and 2nd name are searched separately if both are detected the 1st name data is displayed Pause between 1st and 2nd name is determined by space period or hyphen When press Short cut number 211 219 21 according to the number A to J will be indicated on LCD automatically as first search character Below shows Directory dialing DSX mode indication 1st line left corner 1st line right co...

Page 666: ...5 Feature Illuminated Dialpad Dial 3 6 Feature Auto Call screening Dial 3 7 Feature Incoming Page Dial 3 8 Feature Ringing Line Pref Dial 3 9 Feature Auto Backlight Dial 4 0 Ring Preferences Dial 4 1 Ring Tone Config Intercom Dial 4 2 Ring Tone Config Line Keys Dial 4 3 Ring Tone Config Each Line Keys Dial 5 0 Key Assignments Dial 5 1 Feature Keys Dial 5 2 Primeline Keys Dial 6 0 Call Forwarding D...

Page 667: ...ation Dial 9 5 Option Preferences Backlight Threshold Dial 9 6 IP Addres Information Dial 9 7 IP Phone log off Dial 9 8 Change login password Dial 0 0 Admin Dial 0 1 Time Dial 0 2 Date Dial 0 3 Extension Name Dial 0 4 Clear All Call Fwd Dial 0 5 System Night Key Mode Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s 082U B1 008U Related Features Abbre...

Page 668: ...use Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 13 04 02 Speed Dialing Number and Name Name Maximum 12 Characters Use di al pad to enter name No Setting 13 06 01 Station Speed Dial Number and Name Speed Dialing Data No Setting 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name No Setting 15 02 13 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Redial List Mode 0 ICM Trunk Extension Trunk Mode...

Page 669: ... Missed Call xx Received Call 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 4 Press Enter Cursor key to show Missed Call list Top Left Caller Name Number Top Right Number of Missed Call Bottom Left Navigation Number Bottom Center Month Date Time 111 Missed Call xx xx nnnnnnnn APR MON 02 06 55AM 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 1st Line Navigation Number and Name 2nd Line Caller Number Name 3rd Line Month Date ...

Page 670: ...al IP Multiline Terminal 8 Press Enter Cursor key to check the number Private Phonebook x x Dial nnnnnnnn Name zzzzzzzz 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 9 Press Enter Cursor key to enter the name to be associated with the stored number Private Phonebook x x Name zzzzzzzz Bin XXX 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 10 Press Enter Cursor key to show next available Bin number automatically Private Phone...

Page 671: ...IP Multiline Terminal xx List Number 3 Press the Down Cursor key to select Contacts The display shows 200 Operation List 2 6 Contacts User Features 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 4 Press Enter Cursor key to select Search Contact 210 Contcts 1 3 Search Contact New Contact 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 5 Press Enter Cursor key to show the search mode 211 Search 1 x _ ABC Limited 2W Digital IP M...

Page 672: ... adjust LCD contrast Program PRG 15 02 60 Advanced Mode1 1 With a Multiline Terminal in an idle condition the display shows 1 17 TUE 10 52AM 201 Menu Dir VM xx CL xx 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 2 Press Enter Cursor key to enter Navigation mode The display shows 100 Operation List 1 6 Call History xx Contacts 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal xx List Number 3 Press the Down Cursor key to select...

Page 673: ... Adjustment mode Contrast 1 x Down Up Contrast 5 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 8 Press Left Right Cursor key to adjust the contrast level 9 Press Enter Cursor key to save the change that been made 10 Press Exit key to exit the Navigation Mode Directory dialing DSX Enter Directory dialing DSX mode and search name from Common Group Station Speed dial and Extension name list Program PRG 15 02 60 A...

Page 674: ...rst or Last name start from D Search 1 3 D DAN 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 4 Enter the letter 0 to narrow the list Search 1 2 DO DOLLY 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 5 Search 2 2 matching name by Up Down Cursor key Search 2 2 DO DON 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 6 Press Speaker key or Off Hook to make outgoing call SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 660 Navigation Key N ...

Page 675: ...f hours For more information on assigning trunks to ring extensions refer to Direct Inward Line DIL on page 1 259 Universal Night Answer UNA Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers With UNA an employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key or use Universal Answer to pick up the call Only ring groups calls can be used with Universal Night A...

Page 676: ...rammable Function Key PRG 15 07 01 09 0 under the condition of PRG 20 01 17 Day Night change key mode set 1 skip Conditions Almost all features are affected by Night Mode except for the following Dial Tone Detection External Alarm Sensors Flexible System Numbering Pulse to Tone conversion SMDR Volume Control Call Arrival CAR keys and Virtual Extension keys do not support Day Night Mode 09 Programm...

Page 677: ...n Manual Night Mode changes are allowed 1 12 05 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Night Mode Service Group Number 1 Night Mode Group 1 2 Night Mode Group 2 3 Night Mode Group 3 4 Night Mode Group 4 1 12 06 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Night Mode Service Group Number 1 Night Mode Group 1 2 Night Mode Group 2 3 Night Mode Group 3 4 Night Mode Group 4 1 12 07 01 Text Data for...

Page 678: ...ht Mode Function Setup Automatic Night Mode Switching 0 Off Automatic Night Mode disabled 1 On Automatic Night Mode enabled 0 12 05 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Night Mode Service Group Number 1 Night Mode Group 1 2 Night Mode Group 2 3 Night Mode Group 3 4 Night Mode Group 4 1 12 06 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks Night Mode Service Group Number 1 Night Mode Group 1 2 N...

Page 679: ...ntrol manual night mode COS 1 15 1 11 12 43 Service Code Setup for Service Access An swer No Ring Line Universal Answer 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 9 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Trunk Ac cess Map Number 001 128 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 10 07 Class of Service Options Answer S...

Page 680: ...e key Mode No 1 8 or 0 toggle The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS con soles DSS One Touch key 101 160 The DSS keys 061 114 of all DSS con soles No Setting Operation To activate Night Service by dialing codes 1 At a Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 718 To change a different group s mode dial 718 the group number 01 04 3 Dial the Night Service C...

Page 681: ...ode 3 M Night 02 09 00 12 00 Mode 1 Day 03 12 00 13 00 Mode 4 Rest 04 13 00 17 00 Mode 1 Day 05 17 00 18 00 Mode 4 Rest 06 18 00 22 00 Mode 2 Night 07 22 00 00 00 Mode 3 M Night PRG 12 05 01 TEL100 Group 1 PRG 12 07 01 Mode Group 1 Mode 1 none Mode 2 Night Mode 3 M Night Mode 4 Rest PRG 20 07 01 1 On 1 Current time is 17 30 and mode is Mode 4 Rest 2 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key or Off H...

Page 682: ...g indication The second line appearance stays idle The caller hears ringback tone while their call waits This is set in the called extension Class of Service DID Call Waiting An extension can optionally have DID calls camp on with Off Hook Call Wait signaling without Off Hook Call Wait signaling or no signaling This is set in the called extension Class of Service Block Manual Off Hook Signals This...

Page 683: ...ngs Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline and Single Line Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Callback Call Waiting Camp On Direct Inward Dialing DID Handsfree and Monitor Hotline Intercom One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Reverse Voice Over Single Line Terminals Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 12 03 Service Code ...

Page 684: ... Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 20 13 34 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Block Manual Off Hook Signaling 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 18 06 Service Tone Timers Interval of Call Waiting Tone 1 64800 seconds 10 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Tone 39 Special Audible Ring Busy Tone 0 255 0 Endless Refer to Programming Ma...

Page 685: ...h key again to toggle between the two calls If the Single Line Terminal hangs up with the active call the other call on hold rings back to the single line ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 671 O ...

Page 686: ...ored Flash may be helpful to access features of the connected Telco PBX or Centrex Conditions One Touch keys provide a Busy Lamp Field BLF When a Multiline Terminal user is on a call they can transfer to another station by pressing a DSS key for that station It is not necessary to press Transfer key to transfer to another station using a DSS key When a Multiline Terminal user is on a call they mus...

Page 687: ...8 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Programmable Function Key Programming General Level 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS con soles DSS One Touch key 101 160 The DSS keys 061 114 of all DSS con soles No Setting Operation Programmable Function Keys To define a Programmable Function Key as a One Touch Key 1 Dial the service code ...

Page 688: ... Group a Dial 2 to store a Speed Dial System dialing number OR Dial 4 to store a Speed Dial Group dialing number b Dial Speed Dial number storage code e g 001 c Press Hold key d Press Speaker key For Central Office Calls Placing Trunk Calling a Dial the general trunk access code 0 OR Dial the specific Trunk Service Code 0 plus the trunk number e g 005 OR Dial the Trunk Group Service Code 704 plus ...

Page 689: ...busy rolls to the next operator in the operator group Default Settings Extension 101 is an operator System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Attendant Call Queuing Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 20 01 01 System Options Operator Access Mode 0 Step Call 1 Circular 0 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension ...

Page 690: ... Trunk s Operator Setting Trunk s Operator Set ting 0 15 0 No Setting 0 20 37 01 Operator Extension Group Setup Operator Ex tension Group Setup Up to eight digits No Setting 20 38 01 Operator Group Setting Operator Access Mode 0 Step 1 Circular 0 Operation Refer to the individual features for operation SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 676 Operator O ...

Page 691: ...rnal on page 1 683 for more on setting up Combined Paging In addition you can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key Using the External Page Function Key when an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed it includes both the external zones and the assigned internal zone s If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group the announcement is made on the e...

Page 692: ...nward Line DIL Direct Station Selection DSS Console Door Box Night Service Paging Internal Programmable Function Keys Transfer Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 10 60 03 Audio Port Setup External Speaker Channel 1 0 3 5 7 9 11 Each chassis can be set except 4th Slot Slot No 4 8 12 0 10 60 04 Audio Port Setup External Speaker Channel 2 0 3 5 7 9 11 Each chassis...

Page 693: ...1 04 01 External Paging Zone Group Paging Group Number 0 3 0 No setting 1 3 Group number Speaker 1 1 Group 1 Speaker 2 2 Group 2 Speaker 3 3 Group 3 31 05 01 Universal Night Answer Ring Over Page Univer sal Night Answer Ring 0 No Ringing No 1 Ringing Yes 0 31 06 01 External Speaker Control Broadcast Splash Tone Before Paging Paging Start Tone 0 No Tone None 1 Splash Tone 2 Chime Tone 2 31 06 02 Ex...

Page 694: ...e Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page may be announced as an External Page only 3 Make an announcement 4 Dial 703 and the External Paging Zone code 1 3 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 3 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if t...

Page 695: ...tops If an invalid VRS number is dialed or there is no recorded VRS greeting the caller hears an error tone Paging External VRS will not play the starting and ending tone if enabled If the starting and ending tones are needed they must be recorded in the VRS message itself After the recorded VRS message is finished the paging telephone hears a busy tone When using the speaker mode on a paging tele...

Page 696: ...Dial 703 and then the External Paging Zone code 1 3 0 for all call 3 Dial VRS message Number 001 100 4 Make announcement 5 Press Speaker key at Multiline Terminal or on hook OR Press the DSS One Touch key programmed for External Paging To Program One Touch Key The following example shows how to program a One Touch key for External Paging zone 2 to play VRS greeting number 099 1 Press Speaker key 2...

Page 697: ...xtensions to an Internal or All Call Paging Group A system must have at least one extension port idle to make an Internal Page If no extension port is idle the extension performing the Page hears a busy signal There are 50 available Internal Paging Groups Zones A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones from showing incoming internal paging informati...

Page 698: ... for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Paging Display 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 31 01 01 System Options for Internal External Paging All Call Paging Zone Name Up to 12 Characters Group all 31 01 02 System Options for Internal External Paging Page Announcement Duration 0 64800 seconds 1200 seconds 31 02 01...

Page 699: ...nal All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page is announced as an External Page only 3 Make an announcement 4 Press Speaker key to hang up Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging Dial 1 and the Comb...

Page 700: ...ble Function Key and Service Code Available for Personal Park The Personal Park feature is enhanced by using a Programmable Function Key or service code 3 digit or 1 digit to place a call in Personal Park This option is available for Multiline Terminals and single line sets and can be used for analog or ISDN trunks Conditions An extension user can park a call in any Park Orbit However an extension...

Page 701: ...virtual extension key Park Retrieve is not supported using DISA Mobile Extension can answer a park call by automatically dialing or by manually dialing the answer park hold service code through a DID Trunk Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Caller ID Direct Station Selection DSS Console Hold Programm...

Page 702: ...d Transfer Service Hold Extended Park 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 11 24 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk Park Hold Mode 0 Non Exclusive Hold Off 1 Exclusive Hold On COS 01 15 1 20 11 25 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Park Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 11 26 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Station Park Hold mode 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 11...

Page 703: ...en Hold and recall until the extension user answers the call or the outside party hangs up To pick up a parked call 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the Park key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 04 orbit OR 1 At the Multiline Terminal press Speaker key OR At Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 6 and the Park orbit 01 50 To Park a call at your extension 1 Do not hang up 2 Press the Personal Park key PRG 15 0...

Page 704: ...e Line Terminal skip pressing Speaker key The Personal Park single digit service code PRG 11 16 11 cannot be used in this operation If it recalls the extension pressing the Personal Park key or flashing Speaker key answers the call To answer a call parked at a co worker s extension 1 Press Speaker key dial plus the co worker s extension number At a Single Line Terminal skip pressing Speaker key To...

Page 705: ...ed up the call will recall to you OR 1 Press Hold or Transfer key 2 Press the DSS BLF key programmed as 6 The Park location will be displayed in the LCD 3 Press Speaker key to hang up ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 691 P ...

Page 706: ...dial Repeat Redial and Save Number Dialed This gives the connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits Conditions When using Account Codes do not use in a PBX access code Otherwise after the the trunk stops sending digits to the central office The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in a Speed Dialing bin If Speed Dialing routes a call to a PBX trunk it does not automati...

Page 707: ...irect Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Flash Pulse to Tone Conversion Ring Groups Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Trunk Group Routing Trunk Groups Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 14 01 01 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk Name Up to 12 characters Trunk Port Number 1 Name Line 001 Trunk Port Number 2 Name Line 002 Trunk Port Number 128 Name Line 128...

Page 708: ...l Restriction 0 Disable PBX CTX call not restricted 1 Enable PBX CTX call re stricted Class 1 6 0 Class 7 1 Class 8 15 0 21 06 08 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup PBX Access Code Table 1 4 No Set ting Operation To place a call over a PBX trunk 1 At Multiline Terminal press Speaker key and dial 704 OR At Single Line Terminal lift the handset and dial 704 2 Dial PBX trunk group number 01 50 3 Dial ...

Page 709: ...ess the PBX trunk key PRG 15 07 01 or SC 752 01 trunk 2 Dial the PBX access code and number In all cases above Toll Restriction may prevent your call ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 695 P ...

Page 710: ...rogram is required The following browsers are supported Internet Explorer 11 or higher Chrome 52 or higher Mozilla Firefox 42 or later An overview of the three programming applications is shown below Chassis WebPro IP PCPro IP Telephone PCPro Modem Figure 1 34 PC Programming Overview Connecting As can be seen in Figure 1 34 PC Programming Overview on page 1 696 three connection types are available...

Page 711: ...tions are established by connecting the LAN cable to CPU Board 3 1 2 4 Figure 1 35 PCPro Connection Dialog 1 Select Connection Type You can connect by entering IP Address in IP or you can enter the NetBIOS Name which you set at PRG 10 62 02 Default is SL2100 2 To login specify User Name and Password 3 Optional Load a defined Connection Account can skip steps 1 3 by using this option 4 To make the ...

Page 712: ... Programming WebPro can be used to edit system programming from a Web browser System Data License Information and Modification History are among the items that can be viewed in WebPro refer to Figure 1 36 WebPro Home Page on page 1 698 Figure 1 36 WebPro Home Page SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 698 PC Programming P ...

Page 713: ...ogramming input the system IP default 192 168 0 10 or NetBIOS Address default http SL2100 like you would logging into WebPro Use the extension number as User Name and Password is assigned in PRG 90 28 01 default 1111 Figure 1 37 WebPro End User Screen Conditions When connecting via a dial up connection a Dial Up Connection PPP must be configured in Windows Network Connections When uploading via a ...

Page 714: ...at same time This can be a any mix of Telephone programming user and Webpro user as long as it wont exceed four users Only One user can be logged into PC PRO While user is logged into PC PRO Webpro Telephone programming couldn t be used When programming via WebPro PCPro it requires you to logout before the system fully applies the changes In the System Data configuration window you can open close ...

Page 715: ...255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 192 168 0 10 10 12 02 CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 ...

Page 716: ...alues 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level 0 Prohibited User 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 5 UA User Programming Ad minister Mode Level 1 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 90 26 01 Program Access Level Setup Maintenance Lev el Level 1 MF Level Level 2 IN Level Level 3 SA Level Level 4 SB Level Refer to the P...

Page 717: ...m and IP connec tions WebPro supports only IP Accounts Y Y WebPro Refer to PRG 90 02 in the Pro gramming Manual Programming Screen Help Text System Data Help Text Y Y Help in WebPro is more simplified than in PCPro Control Hint Text Y Y Smart Links Y Smart Labels Y Y Smart Controls Y Validation Y Y Multi Assign ments Extension Num bers Y PCPro provides special screens that allow multiple values to...

Page 718: ...ro has more simplified help than PCPro Security Application Login Y Y User name password protection to login to PCPro WebPro KTS Connection Login Y PCPro connections to a System are user name password protected File Open Y You can password protect a PCPro saved database Debug Capture CPU Unit Debug Capture Y PCPro provides a tool for capturing debug information from the CPU Board Modification Hist...

Page 719: ...coming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension lifting the handset answers the call Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer s service calls and then dispatch repair technicians When a customer calls in the dispatcher lifts the handset to get their call Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize a...

Page 720: ...e 0 Off 1 On 0 15 02 10 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls 0 Idle Off 1 Ringing On 1 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Trunk Ac cess Map Number 001 128 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 20 08 21 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Serv...

Page 721: ...Speaker key if PRG 20 08 21 is enabled You hear dial tone on your Prime Line To answer a call on your Prime Line 1 Lift the handset Depending on your Line Preference programming you either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 707 P ...

Page 722: ... programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming Direct Inward Line DIL calls ring an idle Department Group member then follow PRG 22 08 then PRG 22 05 An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line A Private Line can also be a Prime Line You should always program a line k...

Page 723: ... 128 as signed with option 7 ac cess incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Trunk Ac cess Map Number 001 128 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 21 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Route Ta ble Number 0 50 0 No Settin...

Page 724: ...your Private Line 1 Press the Private Line key and then press Speaker key or lift handset To place a call from your Multiline Terminal on you Private Line 1 Press the Private Line key then press Speaker key or lift the handset 2 Dial the number To answer a call from your Multiline Terminal on your Private Line 1 Press the Private Line key or press Speaker key or lift handset To place a call on you...

Page 725: ...g is being copied Speed Dialing and One Touch Calling also offer quick access to calls and features Programming a 60 button console requires separate programming Below shows example of function key and LCD display indication PRG 15 07 01 Function Key Assignment Function Number Function Display 00 None Not Define 01 DSS One Touch DSS ONE 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 02 Microphone Key ON OFF Mic...

Page 726: ... of if the telephone is off hook When a Ring Group call rings a station a BLF Indication for this station shows idle or busy based on Class of Service option 20 13 49 All features programmed under one touch keys are still subject to class of service restrictions If you change the extension assigned to a port in PRG 11 02 the line key programming does not follow However if you move the extension us...

Page 727: ...er key 2 Dial 751 for 2 digit codes 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Enter the 2 digit key function any additional information needed for the key and press Hold key For available functions codes refer to PRG 15 07 in the SL2100 Programing Manual To undefine a key enter 00 To change a 3 digit programmable key 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 752 for 3 digit codes 3 Press the key you want to program ...

Page 728: ...2 Press the programmable key The programmed function displays SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 714 Programmable Function Keys P ...

Page 729: ... users in programming mode simultaneously All the logged in users can show up in session management in WebPro PCPro can be logged in with only one user This is allowed only if no other users are logged into programming mode PCPro WebPro or Phone Also if a user is connected to the switch via PCPro no other user can log in through PCPro WebPro or Phone Programming Programming from a Multiline Termin...

Page 730: ...gits Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level 0 Prohibited User 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 5 UA User Programming Ad minister Mode Level 1 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values Operation Refer to the SL2100 Programming Manual for additional information SL2100...

Page 731: ...ne Conversion OR Wait 10 seconds Dial the OCC security code and desired number The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF Conditions Pulse to Tone Conversion is valid only for Dial Pulse trunks PRG 14 02 01 options 0 or 1 Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s 3COIDB C1 Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Multiple...

Page 732: ...F Conver sion Options 0 Automatic 1 Automatic and Manual 2 Manual 2 Operation To convert your telephone dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line 1 Place a call over pulse line 2 Dial to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 718 Pulse to Tone Conversion P ...

Page 733: ...Redial feature work by pressing the Left Cursor key then dial SYS menu is displayed on LCD When set PRG 15 02 60 1 or 2 pressing the Left Cursor key enter Received call log or pressing the Right Cursor key enter Dialed Number log for Redial function Refer Navigation key feature section Stored name for Redial Function is cleared when the system is reset Default Settings Enabled System Availability ...

Page 734: ...al softkey 3 Press the Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to view the number to dial 4 Dial press Speaker key or lift the handset To access a System Speed Dial bin 1 Press the Left Cursor key REDIAL ABB is displayed along with the last dialed number 2 Dial the System Speed Dial bin number The number stored in that bin is displayed for your preview 3 Dial press Speaker key lift the handset or press a...

Page 735: ...er to dial 3 When the desired number is displayed Press Right Cursor key Speaker key or Lift handset To access a Speed Dial by Directory Dialing 1 On Hook condition 2 Press Down Cursor key and press 1st character you want to search 3 Press Up Cursor key or Down Cursor key to select the destination name 4 Press Enter Cursor key to confirm a name and number 5 Press Right Cursor key Speaker key or Li...

Page 736: ...for outgoing calls can affect how a Repeat Redial call is placed Refer to Central Office Calls Placing options as needed For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call Single Line Terminals cannot use Repeat Redial If a user activates repeat dial while they are on an active call the repeat dial process will begin once they end the current call Defau...

Page 737: ...al Setup Repeat Dial Calling Timer 0 64800 seconds 30 21 08 04 Repeat Dial Setup Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk 0 64800 seconds 0 Operation To use Repeat Redial if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy 1 Place a trunk call Listen for busy tone or ring no answer 2 Press the Repeat Redial key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 29 The Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the system to re...

Page 738: ...Extension assignments for Attendant Add On Consoles are not assigned Default Attendant Add On Console key assignments are DSS Keys 001 060 Stations 101 160 First Initialization of the system returns all programming values to default Press and hold the LOAD button and press the Power switch Continue to hold the LOAD switch for approximately 5 10 seconds before releasing The system boots loading Res...

Page 739: ...ne button calling to the associated extension like a Hotline key An extension user cannot however use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls by one touch operation Conditions This feature is available for 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal Only An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension limited only by the number of available function keys When the destination ex...

Page 740: ...ther available op tions in this command 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 Operation When on a call To place a Reverse Voice Over call 1 Press and ...

Page 741: ...you to communicate with the initial reverse voice over caller To return to your initial caller 1 Release the Reverse Voice Over key If the co worker you call hangs up you return to the initial call automatically When the telephone is idle To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination 1 Press your Reverse Voice Over key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 47 destination extension You can optionally lift t...

Page 742: ... the line key If the extension does not have a line key the trunk rings the line appearance key If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group the trunk follows Access Map programming Conditions DIL trunks disregard ring group programming until DIL overflow Default Settings All trunks are in Ring Group 1 Extensions 101 108 ring for trunk calls and all other extensions only fla...

Page 743: ...Trunk Setup Trunk Service Type 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 Tie Line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 11 15 09 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Transfer to Incoming Ring Group 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit No Setting 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No An swer Recall Time 0 64800 seconds 0 No Overflow 0 22 08...

Page 744: ...p Keys Outgoing Option 0 50 0 Assigns the Loop Key for ARS 1 50 Assigns the Loop Key to the trunk group specified 0 Programming Func tion Key No 01 32 15 13 02 Loop Keys Incoming Option 0 50 0 Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups 1 50 Assigns the Loop key to the trunk group specified 0 Programming Func tion Key No 01 32 22 06 01 Normal Incoming Ring Mode Incoming Group Number 0 No Ring 1 Ring ...

Page 745: ...try for all Night Service modes X Trunk assigned to indicated Ring Group PRG 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Ring Group 1 2 3 Ext 301 1 0 1 0 1 Ext 302 0 1 1 0 1 Ext 303 0 1 0 1 1 1 To allow extension user to answer flashing line be sure to give extension incoming access to the trunk in PRG 14 07 and PRG 15 06 1 Extension rings 0 Extension does not ring Operation Refer to Central Office...

Page 746: ...Dial System Group Station numbers and follow their trunk routing as the destination number Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding For example the ringdown destination can forward their calls When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset ringdown automatically calls the extension to which calls are forwarded If the Ringdown Extension user hears busy tone when they lift the handset they can...

Page 747: ...5 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Intercom Calls 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 08 09 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline Extension Ringdown 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 08 19 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline for SPK 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 21 01 09 System Options for Outgoing Calls Ri...

Page 748: ...before your ringdown goes through If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled your call voice announces If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled your call rings To answer a call if you are another extension ringdown destination 1 Speak toward telephone to answer incoming voice announcement OR Lift the handset or press Speaker key to answer ringing Intercom call SL2100 ISSUE 1...

Page 749: ...terminal During Room monitoring by pressing Talk softkey at monitoring terminal both way talk is available Adding both way talk monitored terminal can make conference call by Talk softkey if multiple terminals are monitoring To provide this feature following PRG need to be set On PRG 20 13 55 Intercom call to room monitor COS of Room Monitored PRG 20 13 11 Room Monitoring PRG 20 13 12 Room Monitor...

Page 750: ...iline Terminals and Single Line Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Hotel Motel Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 14 17 Service Code Setup for Hotel Hotel Room Monitor 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 675 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available ...

Page 751: ...0 Should a keyset user be able to initiate Room Monitor In PRG 20 13 11 enter 1 In PRG 20 13 12 enter 0 Should a keyset user have the ability to be monitored by another extension In PRG 20 13 12 enter 1 In PRG 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions In PRG 15 07 01 assign a Room Monitor key code 39 to both the monitoring and monitored extension Stop Yes No Yes No Figure 1 38 Multiline Room ...

Page 752: ...ation You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you want to monitor You can only listen to one extension at a time Multiline Terminals To activate Room Monitor from an idle Multiline Terminal initiating extension 1 Press the Room Monitor key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 39 2 Dial the number of extension you want to monitor You can place and answer other cal...

Page 753: ... be monitored 1 Lift the handset at the telephone to be monitored 2 Dial 675 3 Dial 1 4 Dial number of the extension number which is monitoring the telephone 5 Place the handset on the desk placing the handset transmitter towards the room You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active To cancel Room Monitor at either extension 1 Hang up the handsets for both the monitored and ...

Page 754: ...tiating extension case PRG 20 13 11 1 On to Ext101 and Ext102 PRG 20 13 55 1 On to Ext100 Ext100 is set as Room Monitored extension 1 At Ext101 and Ext102 make ICM call to Ext100 2 Room Monitor started automatically 3 Press the Talk softkey at Ext100 and start Conf call with Ext101 and Ext102 4 At Ext102 On hook backs to Monitoring state and Ext100 and Ext101 remain ICM talk 5 At either On Hook bo...

Page 755: ...bers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered unanswered or busy The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired Conditions For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects Function keys simplify Save Number Dialed operation Default Settin...

Page 756: ...m of 36 digits Use this feature before hanging up Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Save Number Dialed key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 30 Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 715 To redial a saved number Multiline Terminal 1 Press an idle trunk line key This selects a specific trunk for the call 2 Press the Save Number Dialed key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 30 The stored number dials out OR 1 Press Speaker key 2 ...

Page 757: ...ys for 10 seconds The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset Press an idle line key Press Speaker key 2 Press Exit key To clear your saved number Multiline Terminal 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 785 3 Press Speaker key to hang up Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset and dial 785 2 Hang up ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 743 S ...

Page 758: ... assigned Up to 32 calls can be queued waiting on an SIE key When a Secondary Incoming Extension call is received and answered while the user is on an outside line the first call can be automatically put on hold If a trunk call rings a Secondary Incoming Extension to answer the call the station must be programmed with the direct trunk appearance key and the SIE must be programmed to allow the call...

Page 759: ...rtual Extension Ring Tone Setup In coming Ring Pattern 0 8 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming extension ring tone 5 Melody1 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melody2 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 7 Melody3 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 Melody4 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 0 15 09 01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Ringing 0 No Ringing ...

Page 760: ...ce Enabled COS 01 15 1 20 13 27 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 21 01 15 System Options for Outgoing Calls Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Toll Restriction 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 1 23 04 01 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions Extension Group Number 0 50 0 No Setting 0 Operation To answer a call ringing a SIE k...

Page 761: ...use this feature for example to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting After being alerted the boss could call the secretary when it is most convenient An extension can have a Secretary Call key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call is not available to Single Line Terminal users Secretary Call does not se...

Page 762: ...r boss s or secretary s buzzer key flashes fast The telephone continues to ring until the Secretary Call key is pressed To check to see who left you a Secretary Call 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press Help key 3 Press the Secretary Call key that flashed 4 Press Exit key To answer your Secretary Call indication 1 Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you To cancel a Secretary Call you ...

Page 763: ...retary Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls An extension can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to Single Line Terminal users An extension user can also have Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroute a co worker s calls to themselves A Multiline Terminal can h...

Page 764: ...15 07 or SC 751 42 boss extension Your Secretary Call Pickup key lights and the boss s telephone display shows BOSS FWD Calls intended for covered extension ring your telephone instead To cancel Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 42 boss extension To check a key Secretary Call Pickup assignment 1 Press Help key 2 Press your Secretary Call Pickup ke...

Page 765: ...rt 1 2 of 082U B1 A maximum of 6 sensors can be connected Applied voltage when sensor is Off 25V Loop current when sensor is On 40mA PRG 82 21 needs to set up according to used sensor Security sensor can start and stop automatically according to PRG 20 48 01 setting Security sensor can start and stop manually using Service code 719 or function key 33 assigned after the timer PRG 20 55 01 time outs...

Page 766: ...message storage Room Monitoring from outside To use the Room Monitoring feature the caller ID of the outside caller and the monitored extension number have to set The monitored extension is set in PRG 13 04 03 04 These program can be set by a Service Code in the Speed Dial name setting indication for the outside caller 1 Press Speaker key dial 753 at terminal 2 Dial speed dial storage code 3 Dial ...

Page 767: ...l for the number of times specified in PRG 20 45 07 Maximum of 6 extensions can be set as Remote Inspection terminals If all VRS channels are busy tone will be provided instead of VRS message such as for inspection message or for destination message If VRS message itself is not recorded tone will be provided Emergency call destination MUST be set considering this feature s purpose The emergency nu...

Page 768: ...0 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Number Maximum of 36 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 13 04 03 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer Mode 0 Not Used Calls will not be routed based off a users caller ID 1 Internal Dial Calls will be routed to an internal number specified in PRG 13 04 04 2 Incomi...

Page 769: ...00 20 45 03 Remote Watch Setup Ring Timer 0 60 0 20 45 04 Remote Watch Setup Auto Dial Number Area Setting 0 999 0 20 45 05 Remote Watch Setup VRS Message for Answer 0 100 0 20 45 06 Remote Watch Setup VRS Message for Auto Di al 0 100 0 20 45 07 Remote Watch Setup Time of Repeat Auto Dial 0 255 0 20 45 08 Remote Watch Setup Auto Dial Calling Time 0 3600 0 20 45 09 Remote Watch Setup Interval of Au...

Page 770: ...Sensor Mode 0 Off 1 On 0 20 46 02 Security Sensor Setup Internal Paging Group for Warning Message 0 50 0 20 46 03 Security Sensor Setup External Paging Group for Warning Message 0 3 0 20 46 04 Security Sensor Setup VRS Message for Warn ing 0 100 0 20 46 05 Security Sensor Setup Auto Dial Number Area Setting 0 999 0 20 46 06 Security Sensor Setup VRS Message for An swer 0 100 0 20 46 07 Security Se...

Page 771: ...ction key PRG 20 44 01 1 Internal paging group 1 PRG 20 44 02 1 External paging group 1 PRG 20 44 03 1 VRS message number for watching 1 PRG 20 44 04 5 Interval time of Watching message 5 minutes PRG 20 47 01 1 Watch mode time pattern 1 To record Watching message to VRS 001 1 Press Speaker key dial 616 7 001 at terminal 2 After beep tone record message 3 Press Speaker key and finish recording Set ...

Page 772: ...46 03 1 External paging group 1 PRG 20 46 04 1 VRS message number for warning 1 PRG 20 46 05 999 Speed dial bin number 999 PRG 20 46 06 2 VRS message number for destination answer 2 PRG 20 46 07 30 Auto Dial Wait Timer 30 sec PRG 20 46 08 3 Times of auto repeat dial 3 PRG 20 46 09 30 Auto dial calling time 30 sec PRG 20 46 10 200 Monitored terminal number 200 PRG 20 46 11 30 Interval of Auto Dial ...

Page 773: ...ct Security Sensor On 1 Warning message send to internal page group1 and external page group 1 2 Place outgoing call automatically according to speed dial bin 999 3 When destination answered send VRS message 2 4 After finishing VRS message 2 destination person can monitor through extension 200 By dialing from outside it is possible to make both way talk When send Warning message When send Warning ...

Page 774: ...minutes PRG 20 45 04 999 Speed dial bin number 999 PRG 20 45 05 1 VRS message number when inspected extension answered 1 PRG 20 45 06 2 VRS message number when emergency call destination answered 2 PRG 20 45 07 3 Times of auto repeat dial 3 PRG 20 45 08 30 Auto dial calling time 30 sec PRG 20 45 09 30 Interval of Auto Dial 30 sec Set up Remote Inspection 1 Press Speaker key dial 619 at Multiline T...

Page 775: ...mote Inspection ring 1 At 12 00 o clock start ringing at extension 200 2 Continue ringing over 3 minutes 3 Stop ringing at extension 200 and place outgoing call automatically according to speed dial bin 999 4 When destination answered send VRS message 2 5 After finishing VRS message 2 destination person can automatically monitor through extension 200 6 By dialing from outside it is possible to mak...

Page 776: ...by the appended date They could then tell when the user is coming back from vacation The system allows all telephones to use the Selectable Display Messaging feature at the same time All telephones are able to use Selectable Display Messaging at one time The default messages are Table 1 54 Selectable Display Messaging Defaults 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal No Message Change to 01 IN MEETING UNT...

Page 777: ...ne Telephones Time and Date Display Mode 4 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 19 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Selectable Display Messaging Text Mes saging 0 Off 1 On 1 20 16 01 Selectable Display Messages Selectable Dis play Messages Refer to Programming Manual Table 1 55 ...

Page 778: ... append to the message You can append messages 1 8 and 10 with digits e g the time when you will be back Enter the time in 24 hour format 6 Press Speaker key to hang up Intercom calls to extensions with Selectable Display Messaging set receive a DND signal and receive the display message on their telephone display instead of ringing the extension based on the setting in PRG 20 01 02 To allow calls...

Page 779: ...n their telephone is ringing Conditions None Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 11 20 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 7...

Page 780: ...ital IP Mul tiline Terminal 7 Melody4 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 Melody5 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup In coming Ring Pattern 0 8 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming extension ring tone 5 Melody1 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melody2 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 7 Melody3 2W Dig...

Page 781: ...3 Low 7 Ring Tone 4 4 Ring Tone 1 8 Ring Tone 5 Operation To change your extension incoming ring tones 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 720 3 Dial 1 to set Intercom ring 2 to set trunk ring 4 Dial code for the desired ring pattern 1 8 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 5 Press Speaker key to hang up To listen to the incoming ring choices 1 Press idle Speaker key 2 Dial 711 3 Dial 1 to listen to Intercom r...

Page 782: ...u re done and I ll get him back Conditions The transferring extension can remain off hook to auto receive the callback or hang up and it rings back to them Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 43 or assigning Transfer key as Call Back in PRG 15 02 05 1 Serial Call is not available to Single Line Terminals Serial Call can be activated only during a supervised ...

Page 783: ...ss Hold or Transfer key 3 Dial co worker s extension number Co worker must lift the handset to respond to your announcement 4 Press the Serial Call key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 43 OR 5 Press Transfer key if PRG 15 02 05 is set to Call Back Serial Call 6 When MLT Display shows WAIT TRF extension can hang up When your co worker hangs up the call the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your ex...

Page 784: ...n and reply GetRequest Information on watch target equipment is requested of an agent from a manager An agent acquires requested information and replies to a manager Setting request of information and reply SetRequest Setting change in the watch target equipment is requested of an agent from a manager An agent carries out requested setting change and replies to a manager The Supported Management I...

Page 785: ...rly configured an SL2100 sends trap to SNMP Application A properly configured MIB OID file which is fully compiled in the MIB browser is required before the MIB browser can perform Get operations from the SNMP agent The Target Host parameter referenced in Program 90 64 is the SNMP network management device s that are run on an external PC SL2100 do not support warmStart trap epgNeighborLoss trap a...

Page 786: ...0 0 0 0 90 64 04 SNMP Setup Target Host 2 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 90 64 05 SNMP Setup Target Host 3 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 90 64 06 SNMP Setup Target Host 4 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 90 64 07 SNMP Setup Target Host 5 0 0 ...

Page 787: ...s for Single Line Terminals Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time Forced Dial does not reset when a digit is dialed The user must finish dialing all the digits before this timer expires entries 0 64800 seconds default 0 Conditions Dial Pulse Single Line Terminals cannot access any feature that requires the user to dial or A Single Line Terminal can initiate an Internal Zone page but cannot rec...

Page 788: ...l Forwarding DND Override Call Waiting Camp On Callback Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Conference Department Calling Department Step Calling Directed Call Pickup Do Not Disturb Door Box Flash Forced Trunk Disconnect Group Call Pickup Hold Intercom Last Number Redial Line Preference Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging Transfer Message Waiting Night Service ...

Page 789: ...TMF receivers Dial tone detection Caller ID detection Resource 01 140 0 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type 0 DP 1 DTMF Port1 112 1 DTMF Port113 128 0 DP 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Termi nal Type 0 Normal 1 Special Port1 112 0 Nor mal Port113 128 1 Special 15 03 05 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Polarity Reverse 0 Off 1 On 0 15 03 0...

Page 790: ... Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Continued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 20 15 01 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Signal Type Nor mal Incoming Call on Trunk Ringing Cycle Number 1 13 3 20 15 03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Signal T...

Page 791: ...p ON Detect Time 1 255 15 15 ms 3825 ms Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 03 08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect Time 1 255 15 15 ms 3825 ms Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detection Level 0 0 dBm 25 dBm 1 5 dBm 30 dBm 2 10 dBm 35 dBm 3 15 dBm 40 dBm 4 20 dBm 45 dBm 5 25 dBm 50 dBm 6 30 dBm 55 dBm Refer ...

Page 792: ...ry possible using this numbering scheme This presentation can be a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs Internet Telephony Service Providers so it is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly Conditions E 164 Enhancement is applied for the SIP trunk interface Outgoing call from caller history of incoming calls is only possible from multiline...

Page 793: ...e international access code in a SIP INVITE for in coming calls then delete the only Example Output Incoming call from 4902131795770 Displayed in terminal incoming caller history as 01 4902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL Delete and replace the and matched country code from an incoming SIP INVITE using E 164 numbering scheme PRG 84 14 16 PRG 84 14 13 Description Comments 1 Mode 1 1 Mode 1 With a SIP ...

Page 794: ...r incoming calls When a is presented as the international access code along with a country code that DOES NOT match the value in PRG 10 02 01 then delete the and add the international access code value in PRG 10 02 02 only Or With a SIP INVITE for incoming calls When a is presented as the international access code along with a country code that DOES match the value in PRG 10 02 01 then delete the ...

Page 795: ...king an outgoing call from history of incoming calls No Operation LCD 1 From an idle multiline terminal Clock Calendar 101 STA 101 List Dir ICM PRG 2 Press Soft Key List LIST MENU Redial CID 3 Press Soft Key CID 01 004902131795770 3 5 11 17 Store DEL 5 Press SPK Line 001 00 01 004902131795770 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 781 S ...

Page 796: ...unk E 164 Support enabled the SIP call could be presented once dialed as below Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 This presentation can be a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs Internet Telephony Service Providers so it is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly Below is the full list of SIP header fields used by th...

Page 797: ...asic Information Setup SIP Trunk Incoming Outgoing via E164SIP_URI 0 Off 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 3 Mode 3 SIP Profile 1 6 0 Operation To make a call using E 164 number format 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker Dial 00441202223344 The system will automatically modify the required header fields of the SIP INVITE message as per the configuration settings in the table below before then forwarding to the...

Page 798: ... 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 0044 1202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 44 1509555123 172 16 0 10 2 00 Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Asserted Identity P Asserted Identity 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Preferred Identity P Preferred Identity 441509555123 172 16 0 10 No...

Page 799: ...on on LCD or related key operations can be configured not to work by each terminal base Conditions If a feature is restricted by an extension Class of Service though the Softkey menu still displays the option the user cannot set the feature The feature must be active to change the volume e g telephone must be ringing page being heard etc To use Softkey Disable function PRG 15 02 71 has to set 1 Di...

Page 800: ...elephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Dutch 7 Portuguese 8 Norwegian 9 Danish 10 Swedish 11 Turkish 12 Latin American Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish 16 Russian 1 15 02 60 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Soft Key Navigation key Mode 0 Standard Mode 1 Advanced Mode1 2 Advanced Mode2 2 15 02 71 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup D...

Page 801: ...epartment Step Calling Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Department Calling Department Step Calling Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 16 01 Single Digit Service Code Setup Step Call 0 9 Maximum of 1 digit 2 16 01 03 Department Group Basic Data Setup Depart ment Routing when Busy ...

Page 802: ...0 Off Calls are not queued 1 On Calls are queued COS 01 15 0 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 Operation To make a Step Call 1 Place a call to a busy extension SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 788 Station Hunt S ...

Page 803: ...cture of data terminal activity Digit Counting With Digit Counting SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls For example if the digit count is nine SMDR does not include toll calls in the home area code Digit Counting permits SMDR to include only the calls you want to monitor Digit Masking Digit Masking lets you X out portions of the number dialed on the SMDR report A digit mask of seven for e...

Page 804: ...s at this point 1 for the A to B call and 1 for the A to C call A 3rd record is printed once party B or C goes idle Unscreened Transfer If party A calls Party B and transfers to party C without talking to party C there is 1 record at this point A 2nd record is printed once party B or C goes idle Mobile Extension An internal call to a mobile extension generates two records Internal extension to mob...

Page 805: ...PIN 10 53 12 09 002 2142623801 NO ANSWER For Intercom call setup with PRG 15 01 14 1 SMDR Output for placed Intercom Calls and PRG 15 01 15 1 SMDR Output for answered Intercom Calls in this example Extension 201 calls 202 and answered the call Then 201 Put 202 on hold and call 203 203 then answered the 201 call Then 201 transferred the call and 202 and 203 is connected displays as follows CLASS TI...

Page 806: ...r Full NEXT Calling Party Name for previous record PTRS Transferred call Incoming Outgoing IVIN BRI PRI inbound trunk call IVOT Outgoing BRI PRI trunk call IVOTP Outgoing BRI PRI trunk call with Personal Code ITRS Transferred BRI PRI call Incoming Outgoing SDTA Internal Data Call IDIN Incoming Tie Line call IDOT Outgoing Tie Line call SAD Outgoing call from sensor WAD Outgoing call form remote ins...

Page 807: ... 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name 42 Space 43 62 Number dialed 20 digits maximum 63 Space 64 79 Account number or NO ANSWER Table 1 59 SMDR Report Format with PRG 35 02 14 Set to 1 Character Position Field Definition Header Line 1 1 60 Spaces 61 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE 76 Space 77 79 Report page number e g 001 CR LF Carriage return and line feed Header Line...

Page 808: ... 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name 42 Space 43 62 Number dialed 20 digits maximum 63 Space 64 79 Account number or NO ANSWER Table 1 60 SMDR Summary Report OUTGOING CALL COST SUMMARY FOR DAY OF nn nn nn TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS 0 TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS 0 NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED 0 COST 0 NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED 0 COST 0 OUTGOING CALL C...

Page 809: ...cond lines are sometimes separated When the buffer is full the overflowed data may not be shown The special characters used in the system cannot be output to the SMDR they are converted to _ To use the PBX Call Reporting option program system for behind PBX operation SMDR can record print Internal calls Terminal that has a tandem setting will not be included in Internal SMDR feature Internal SMDR ...

Page 810: ...tput 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 8 UC Web Application 0 External Device 9 1st Party CTI 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 External Device 14 IP DECT Directory Ac cess 0 External Device 15 Presence 0 14 01 06 Basic Trunk Data Setup SMDR Printout 0 No trunk will not be reported ...

Page 811: ... 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask VoIPDB 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255...

Page 812: ...layed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 08 SMDR Output Options Incoming Call 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 09 SMDR Output Options Extension Number or Name 0 Name 1 Number 1 35 02 10 SMDR Output Options All Lines Busy ALB Output 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 35 02 12 SMDR Output Options DID Table Name Output 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 35 02 13 SMDR Output Options CLI Output When DID to Trunk 0 Not Displ...

Page 813: ...0 American Format Month Day Year 1 Japanese Format Year Month Day 2 European Format Day Month Year 2 SMDR flowcharts are located on the following pages Start Connect an Ethernet cable from the CPU to the PC to be used for SMDR In PRG 10 20 01 define the TCP port when communicating to the SMDR external device 5 In PRG 35 01 01 set the SMDR output for SMDR port to 3 for LAN Go to A Figure 1 40 SMDR ...

Page 814: ...security codes Yes Yes No No In PRG 35 01 04 enter the number of digits you want to block If you enter 8 for example SMDR Xs out the last 8 digits dialed Do you want to block i e X out any of the digits on the SMDR report To have only long distance calls print for example enter 8 In PRG 35 01 05 enter the minimum number of digits a user must dial 1 24 before system will include call on SMDR report...

Page 815: ...de Calls All Calls If your system is behind a PBX do you want SMDR to include all calls ito the PBX or just calls using the PBX trunk access code In PRG 35 02 02 enter 1 Trunk Name In PRG 35 02 03 enter 0 Should the SMDR report display the trunk name or the date and trunk number Date and Trunk Number In PRG 35 02 03 enter 1 In PRG 35 02 14 enter 0 In PRG 35 02 14 enter 1 Enter 0 to disable the fol...

Page 816: ...mes or numbers In PRG 35 02 19 enter 1 In PRG 35 02 09 enter 0 In PRG 35 02 10 enter 0 Should the SMDR report include information when all lines in a group are busy and a user tries to access the group Should the DID table name be displayed for incoming DID calls Should the SMDR report display the Caller ID when an incoming DID number is transferred to an outgoing trunk Continued on next page Exte...

Page 817: ... dialed for ANI DNIS and DID trunks or both In PRG 35 02 16 enter 1 Both In PRG 35 02 16 enter 2 In PRG 35 02 17 enter 0 Should the SMDR report include the Account Code or Caller ID name Account Code In PRG 35 02 17 enter 1 Caller ID name In PRG 35 02 18 enter 0 Should the Caller ID Name appear on the same line as the call record In PRG 35 02 18 enter 1 Selecting this option inserts line feed and ...

Page 818: ...System Availability Terminals All display Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Directory Dialing Name Storing Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 11 22 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Extension Name Programming 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 700 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name Up to 12 Characters No Setting 15...

Page 819: ... or SC 751 55 3 Press Hold key 4 Enter the name Refer to Table 1 54 Selectable Display Messaging Defaults 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal on page 1 762 Your name can be up to 12 digits maximum 5 Press Hold key 6 Press Speaker key to hang up To program any extension name 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 700 OR Press the Extension Name Change key PRG 15 07 or SC751 55 3 Enter the extension number to be n...

Page 820: ... t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В Enter characters π Σ σ Ω Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space Clear Back or DND 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal Clear the character entry one character at a time ...

Page 821: ...f the Extension Swap service code is dialed from an extension whose Class of Service does not allow Extension Data Swap busy tone is heard If the destination extension entered is not a valid extension busy tone is heard The following user setting data is relocated with the extension All other user setting data is either not relocated or cleared DND Call Forwarding Memo Dial Last Number Dial Histor...

Page 822: ...ing Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup PRG 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment PRG 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions PRG 15 14 Programmable One Touch Keys PRG 15 20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment PRG 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions PRG 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions PRG 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions PRG 21 04 Toll Restriction ...

Page 823: ...t default PRG 11 15 12 3 Dial the Extension Data Swap Password not assigned at default PRG 92 05 01 4 Dial the extension to be swapped with or relocated to 5 When successfully completed confirmation tone is heard and the display shows completed 6 Press Speaker key twice to exit ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 809 S ...

Page 824: ...trol the scroll feature One record in SYSTEM CALL HISTORY function is registered relating to one external incoming call If a notified calling number agrees in search of Common ABB Program 13 04 area the name of ABB is registered into the SYSTEM CALL HISTORY record Telephone Book is not applied Internal Caller Logs are not displayed in this feature Search and jump function are not supported The Cal...

Page 825: ...Line Key 1 32 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by de fault 35 System Call History Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values Related System Data Program No Program Name Input Data Default 15 02 34 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Call Reg ister Mode 0 Trunk Mode 1 Extension Trunk Mode 0 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Lin...

Page 826: ...g one by one 001 4002 9 30 16 13 Jeff Store DEL Figure 1 45 System Caller Log Example 1 3 User can page by pushing up and down key 200 4001 9 25 13 10 Bill Store DEL Figure 1 46 System Caller Log Example 2 4 LED Operation On Red Other Using On Green Using Off Not Using SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 812 System Caller Log S ...

Page 827: ...ither telephone Tandem Ringing can support up to 64 pairs of Tandem Ringing extensions The extension user which enables Tandem Ringing is the master while the slave telephone is the extension entered by the user while setting up the feature A slave telephone ignores the settings for DND and follows the master telephone settings instead Voice Call is not supported on a Multiline Terminal with Tande...

Page 828: ... Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Tandem Ringing 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit No Setting 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment The DSS keys 001 060 of all DSS consoles DSS One Touch key 101 160 The DSS keys 061 114 of all DSS consoles No Setting Operation To ...

Page 829: ...he key is lit While the feature is active if either the master or slave telephone is on a call no calls can be placed or answered at the other extension until the busy telephone has hung up Multiline Terminals indicate TANDEM IN USE in the display and Single Line Terminal users hear a busy signal when the handset is lifted To cancel Tandem Ringing 1 Dial PRG 11 11 41 OR Press the Tandem Ringing ke...

Page 830: ...g from Conference An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference by dialing a 3 digit service code 8 or a uniquely programmed Transfer key Method B Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call they have placed on Hold It uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call Method C Au...

Page 831: ... DTMF With an analog trunk the Continue Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from the opposite side trunk With an ISDN trunk PRG 14 01 25 must be enabled to detect the Continue Disconnect code The Continue Disconnect code is not accepted while dialing a trunk Continue Disconnect codes do not work if all receivers are busy A trunk can be set up to automatically tandem trunk forward to an outs...

Page 832: ... Trans fer 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 07 11 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Forced Trunk Disconnect a...

Page 833: ...rogrammable Function Keys Refer to the program ming manual for the default values and for all other available op tions in this command 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 07 11 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Forced Trunk Disconnect analog trunk only 0 Off 1 On COS1 14 COS15 1 20 11...

Page 834: ...p 0 Allow 1 Deny COS 01 15 0 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone 0 64800 seconds 1800 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk 0 64800 seconds 0 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversa tion Warning Tone Time 0 64800 seconds 1800 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversa tion Disconnect Time 0 64800 seconds 30 81 ...

Page 835: ... 12 5 dB in 0 5 dB intervals 32 0 dB 14 01 05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls 1 57 15 5 dB 12 5 dB in 0 5 dB intervals 32 0 dB 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Trans fer 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 07 0...

Page 836: ... 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversa tion Disconnect Time 0 64800 seconds 30 80 01 02 35 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot Refer to Programming Manual Operation Method A Tandem Trunking from Conference To set up a Tandem Call 1 Place or answer first trunk call 2 Press the Conf softkey 3 Place or answer second trunk call 4 To set up the tandem call ...

Page 837: ... i e Press the line key the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in PRG 11 10 26 must be used by an extension other than the originating extension Single Line Terminal To set up a Tandem Call 1 Place or answer first trunk call 2 Press hookflash and dial 1 3 Place or answer second trunk call 4 To set up the tandem call press hookflash and dial 8 5 Hang up This sets up a Conference between bo...

Page 838: ...unking 1 Dial service code 734 or the service code set for Disable Automatic Transfer per Trunk 2 Dial the desired trunk number Trunk Number 001 128 3 Hang up To disconnect the Conference Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key or dial 0 plus the trunk number the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in PRG 11 10 26 To set and change the destination of the Automatic Tandem Trunk call ...

Page 839: ... the user dials the Continue code PRG 20 28 01 to extend the conversation 3 After the programmed time PRG 20 28 03 the warning tone is heard again After the programmed time PRG 24 02 10 the call is disconnected ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 825 T ...

Page 840: ...itional license Caller ID and Call status are available from the TAPI interface functions Only one 3rd Party CTI connection to the SL2100 is supported Refer to Table 1 64 TAPI Commands on page 1 826 for a list of supported TAPI commands Table 1 64 TAPI Commands lineAddProvider lineAnswer lineConfigDialog lineBlindTransfer lineGetAddressCaps lineCompleteCall lineGetDevCaps lineCompleteTransfer line...

Page 841: ... 3rd Party CTI Client or 1st Party CTI Client 3rd Party CTI Client license 0112 Related Features Headset Operation Guide to Feature Programming The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program No Program Name Input Data Default 10 12 01 CPU Network Setup IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 192 168 0 10 ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Fea...

Page 842: ...MIS 0 External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 8 UC Web Application 0 External Device 9 1st Party CTI 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 External Device 14 IP DECT Directory Ac cess 0 External Device 15 Presence 0 10 20 03 LAN Setup for External Equipment Keep ...

Page 843: ...nks when Automatic Headset is activated To cancel Automatic Headset repeat these steps To redirect calls to the headset and disable the hookswitch required for some TAPI features 1 With the Multiline Terminal in an idle state press the Help key 2 Press the Headset key PRG 15 07 or SC 05 twice 3 Press the Exit key to return the display to idle The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activa...

Page 844: ...BUSY tone Tone Override originate is allowed from a Single Line Terminal until the PBR times out Virtual Extensions do not support Tone Override Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Waiting Camp On Data Line Security Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 12 03 Service Code Se...

Page 845: ...ng disabled 1 On ICM off hook signaling enabled COS 01 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 20 13 34 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Block Manual Off Hook Signaling 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Block Camp On 0 Off ...

Page 846: ...2 Press Hold key and talk with the party SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 832 Tone Override T ...

Page 847: ... line is logged The total of incoming calls answer frequency call duration for each line and extension and abandon call frequency of each line is logged and the data is outputted to the PC The system totals the hour day week and month for each terminal and trunk number This information is used by the SMDR feature The extension which is totaled is determined by system programming The system outputs...

Page 848: ...Web Application 0 External Device 9 1st Party CTI 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 External Device 14 IP DECT Directory Ac cess 0 External Device 15 Presence 0 90 20 01 Traffic Report Data Setup Call Traffic Output 0 Not Measured 1 Measure 0 90 20 03 Traffic Report Data Setup All Line Busy Output...

Page 849: ...port when the data reaches the defined value 0 90 20 07 Traffic Report Data Setup Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output 0 Not Detected 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined value 0 90 20 09 Traffic Report Data Setup Attendant Channel All Busy Output 0 Not Detected 1 256 Report when the data reaches the defined value 0 90 21 01 Traffic Report Output Output Port Type 0 No setting 3 LAN 0 Opera...

Page 850: ...up Each method has advantages Automatic On Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier However users have to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold Without Automatic On Hook Transfer extending a call becomes a two step operation but separate from placing calls on Hold Prevent Recall of Transferred Call The Class of Service program has an option that allows you to prevent a Transfer...

Page 851: ...sfer Recall Time the call recalls the transferring extension With Transfer to Busy Extensions disabled PRG 24 02 02 0 you must also set PRG 20 09 07 for the extensions COS to 0 to disable call queuing and PRG 20 13 06 to set Automatic Off hook Signaling to manual An existing call can be transferred into a conference call Meet Me Paging Transfer allows the user to page a co worker and have the call...

Page 852: ... Barge In Call Waiting Camp On Caller ID Call Forwarding Conference Meet Me Paging Transfer One Touch Calling Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Serial Call Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 12 58 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trans fer Into Conference 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 624 11 15 09 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Transfer to Inc...

Page 853: ...of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Recall on Receiving CoS 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 11 20 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service No Callback 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Barg...

Page 854: ...gramming Manual 105 Dial the other extension 0 25 06 02 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Destination Number Up to eight digits Must be a valid extension number that is programmed in command 11 02 or 11 04 No Setting 31 05 01 Universal Night Answer Ring Over Page Univer sal Night Answer Ring 0 No Ringing No 1 Ringing Yes 0 Operation Transferring Trunk Calls To Transfer a trunk calls to a co ...

Page 855: ...minal press Hold key OR At Single Line Terminal hookflash 2 Dial extension to receive your call If the extension is busy does not answer or does not want the call you can dial another extension number or press the lit line key to return to the call In addition you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp On Single Line Terminal users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash If a call has b...

Page 856: ... a Barge In Conference an existing 2 party call into which an extension user has used the Barge In feature to join the Conference becomes a regular 4 party Conference call 4 Hang up Transferring a Call to a Trunk Ring Group 1 While on a call press Transfer key 2 Dial the Transfer to Ring Group service code defined in PRG 11 15 09 You hear confirmation tone 3 Hang up The call is transferred to the ...

Page 857: ...available Trunk Groups and 50 Routes OCC Moderately Expensive WATS Least Expensive DDD Most Expensive Outbound Call First Choice Second Choice Third Choice Conditions DISA PRG 25 10 have separate Trunk Group Routing programs The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming PRG 14 06 when setting up Ringing Line Preference Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks wit...

Page 858: ...ogram Name Input Data Default 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Trunk Access Code Dial Up to four digits 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Trunk Port 1 128 Group Number 0 50 Priority 1 128 1 21 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Route Ta ble Number 0 50 0 No Setting Calls will not route 1 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Trunk Group 0 Not Set 001 050 Trunk group No 1001 1050 1000 Route Ta ble N...

Page 859: ...unk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and outgoing ac cess 7 Full access Access Map 1 128 Trunk Ports 1 128 as signed with option 7 ac cess incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Line Key 1 32 0 99 00 99 Normal Func tion Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function ...

Page 860: ...ed in ARS the system can route the call to a trunk group All DID trunks of the same type should be placed in the same trunk group These trunk groups must then be assigned to a DID Translation Table Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming Default Settings All trunks are in group 1 System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Di...

Page 861: ...ess Access Map 1 128 Trunk Ports 1 128 as signed with option 7 ac cess incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Trunk Ac cess Map Number 001 128 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Line Key 1 32 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code752 by de fault Refer to the program ming manual for the ...

Page 862: ...r a Trunk Group 1 At the Multiline Telephone press Speaker key OR At the Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 704 3 Dial trunk group number 01 50 4 Dial number OR 1 Press the Trunk Group key PRG 15 07 or SC 752 02 group 2 Dial the number To answer an incoming trunk group call 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the flashing Trunk Group key SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 848 Trunk Groups T ...

Page 863: ...multaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group When a trunk becomes free the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left Conditions With Automatic Route Selection ARS Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route A user can camp on or leave a callback request for an extension Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a c...

Page 864: ...0 11 07 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Without Holding 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 29 01 Timer Class for Extension Timer Class for Ex tension 0 15 0 Not assigned 0 20 31 01 Timer Class Timer Assignment Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time 0 64800 seconds 15 20 31 02 Timer Class Timer Assignment Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time 0 64800 seconds 64800 Operation To queue for a...

Page 865: ...st Packet When phones are set to receive Unicast packets the VoIPDB will send a separate RTP stream to each phone that is set to receive the page E g If there are five IP Terminals in the page group and they are all set to Unicast Page Mode the VoIPDB will send five separate RTP streams utilizing five DSP resources When the phones are set to receive Multicast packets the VoIPDB will send one RTP s...

Page 866: ...0 It should be noted that many routing devices available do not support multicast within the range of 224 0 0 0 24 and may require the default address to be changed in the SL2100 VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection Three additional VoIPDB DSP resource assignments are available The assignments are Common without Unicast Paging Multicast Paging and Unicast Paging The assignments assist with keeping IP Ter...

Page 867: ...al must have a gateway programmed to accomplish the multicast transmission When an actual gateway device does not exist on the network a dummy gateway address on the same subnet must be defined When utilizing Multicast mode and a page group consists of all IP Terminals the page is sent via a multicast message from the initiating phone If a paging group has IP and TDM Terminals when an IP Terminal ...

Page 868: ...alues and for all other available op tions in this command 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Paging Display 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 1 31 01 01 System Options for Internal External Paging All Call Paging Zone Name Up to 12 Characters Group all ...

Page 869: ...0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page is announced as an External Page only 2 Make announcement 3 Press Speaker key to hang up Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 50 Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal ...

Page 870: ...cycles through the idle members of a UCD Department Calling group The call continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up However if the next station in the cycle is busy when a new call comes in the call queues to the busy agent New calls do not hunt past a busy agent Busy or Not Answered A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a UCD Department Calling...

Page 871: ...ty 2 Priority 3 CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Figure 1 50 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Priority Call Routing ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 857 U ...

Page 872: ...ing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 Figure 1 51 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 858 Uniform Call Distribution UCD U ...

Page 873: ...hen Busy Auto Step Call 0 Normal Intercom caller hears busy tone 1 Circular Intercom caller routes to an idle group member 0 16 01 04 Department Group Basic Data Setup Hunting Mode 0 Stop at last member non loop 1 Circular 0 16 01 05 Department Group Basic Data Setup Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation 0 Manual Ring the extensions one at a time when the service code are pressed 1 Automatic Rin...

Page 874: ...ff 1 On COS 01 15 1 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Trunk Service Type 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 Tie Line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Number of Transferring Desti nation Maximum of 8 digits 0 9 No Setting 24 02 05 System Options for Transfer Message Wait Ring Interval Time 0 64800 seconds 30 24 02 08 ...

Page 875: ... log back in to your UCD Department Calling Group While you log back in Uniform Call Distribution routes calls to your extension 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 650 and 0 OR Press the UCD Department Calling Log In key PRG 15 07 or SC 751 46 The key goes out when you log back in ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 861 U ...

Page 876: ...assis IP Extension IP MLT Std SIP 112 DTMF Receiver 2W 72 CPU 24 EXIFB 48 VoIP Channels 128 Number of available Channels is Controlled by license Voice Mail Channels 16 CPU Built In 4ch EXIFB 4ch 16ch V 34 Modem 1 Channel The Modem circuit is on the EXIFB board IP4WW Battery Box 1 Note1 Slot 4 of each chassis does NOT SUPPORT any types of Multi Line Terminals Analog extensions and any types of Tru...

Page 877: ...Default Settings None System Availability Terminals N A Required Component s Any Board Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 10 03 01 ETU Setup The assigned data varies de pending on the board installed in the slot Please refer to the SL2100 Programming Manual for more detailed description of the 10 03 xx programs 90 34 01 Firmware Informatio...

Page 878: ...Operation None SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 864 Universal Slots U ...

Page 879: ...k and have entered the service code when programming any function Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Abbreviated Dialing Speed Dial Clock Calendar Display Time and Date Code Restriction Toll Restriction One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and...

Page 880: ...The NAT Traversal is supported for this feature The STUN TURN server can be used to achieve NAT Traversal First STUN is used to test the possibility of peer to peer communication via NAT If STUN is successful the peer to peer communication is established If STUN fails TURN is used for Relay communication where the TURN server acts as a Relay Server If this occurs clients make connection with the e...

Page 881: ... application If the connection of conference with the system is disconnected the conference is closed Standard SIP or Simple MCU is not supported If user accesses the secondary system s URL when using NetLink the system displays an error There is a possibility that after a browser upgrade this feature becomes unusable Thin Client PC is not supported When using HTTPS connection a security warning o...

Page 882: ...this feature with Internet Explorer 11 Temasys WebRTC Plugin can be downloaded from following link https temasys atlassian net wiki display TWPP Downloading and Installing Supported Platforms Windows Operating System Windows 7 8 or 8 1 32 or 64 bit Windows 10 32 or 64 bit is supported Web Browser Google Chrome v42 or later Internet Explorer 11 is supported Android Operating system Android v 4 4 2 ...

Page 883: ...7 355 36 885 7 person 0 414 0 186 0 186 12 912 12 912 26 610 8 826 8 826 44 262 8 person 0 483 0 217 0 217 15 064 15 064 31 045 10 927 10 927 51 639 Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 10 12 01 CPU Network Setup IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 192 168 0 10 10 12 02 CPU Network Setup Sub...

Page 884: ...0 65535 External Device 1 CTI Sever 0 External Device 2 ACD MIS 0 External Device 4 Net working system 0 External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 8 UC Web Application 0 External Device 9 1st Party CTI 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 External Device 14 IP DEC...

Page 885: ...90 54 01 PC Web Programming Setting WebPro TCP Port Number 0 65535 80 90 54 03 PC Web Programming Setting Web Program ming TCP Port HTTPS 0 65535 0 HTTP access is not available 443 Operation Login 1 Access the following URL using the web browser http System URL IP address or NetBIOS Name uc or https System URL IP address or NetBIOS Name uc 2 Enter the User ID and Password defined in Programs 20 57...

Page 886: ...72 2 Conf List displays existing conference maximum conference Serial number organizer name and the number of participants in a conference is displayed This list is updated in real time 3 If the creation of conference is successful the conference screen appears refer to Figure 1 55 Conference Screen with Conference ID on page 1 872 This webpage asks permission to access the camera and MIC In case ...

Page 887: ...conference the conference screen is displayed with self and other s screen display The webpage ask the permission to access the camera and MIC If the number of participant reaches the maximum limit an error message is displayed Conference 1 After successful participation of a conference the following is displayed 2 When a user joins the conference the application will attempt to access the camera ...

Page 888: ...tton for Camera Screen Share This button is only displayed on the self video screen This button is used to switch camera to screen share and vice versa While using screen share this button turns orange The Video Switching button is not displayed on Android systems or if the connection is not made using HTTPS The Video Switching button is not displayed with Internet Explorer as screen sharing is no...

Page 889: ... a conference by passing the login screen https System URL uc conf id Conference ID u User ID p Password Duration Timer and End Alert Timer The SL2100 starts the web conference duration timer from the time when an organizer creates a conference When the End Alert timer is not zero and is shorter than the Web Conference Duration timer then an End Alert is displayed as per Program 20 64 02 value bef...

Page 890: ... Screen or particular application press Share button on the NEC Screen Sharing window to share the screen with other user Figure 1 58 NEC Screen Sharing Window Screen will be shared with other users refer to Figure 1 59 Example of Users Sharing Window on page 1 877 SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 876 Video Conference with Web RTC V ...

Page 891: ...on Errors on page 1 877 lists the common errors displayed using the status and error conditions Table 1 68 Common Errors Status Error Condition Displayed Messages Loading Non supported browser or OS This Web Browser OS is not supported Login Error with User ID or password The user name password combination is invalid Create Conference ID is duplicated The conference ID is already in use Conference...

Page 892: ...s expired Web Conference Duration Timer has expired The conference has ended Table 1 69 Special Conditions on page 1 878 lists special conditions where the system returns a 204 No Content without displaying an error message to prevent external attacks Table 1 69 Special Conditions Status Error Condition Join Accessing an invalid URL Accessing the secondary system s URL in a NetLink system By passi...

Page 893: ...ide Voice Over When a valid system station calls a Virtual Extension appearing on another station Voice and MW softkeys appear in the display of the calling station but they do not operate When talking on a Virtual Extension you can mute the handset Incoming calls to a virtual extension that appear on stations that are used with the CTI applications PC Assistant or PC Attendant do not show up as a...

Page 894: ...yed to the user who is on the call In case of assigned at IP7WW 12 24TXH B1 and IP7 8IPLD C1 TEL IP4WW 12 24TXH B and IP4WW 24TIXH C PRG 15 01 13 PRG 15 02 03 Ring Tone at called Virtual Extension Special Ringtone Choice Extension Ring Tone 0 Incoming extension ringtone any Same internal ringtone 1 8 Tone pattern 1 8 1 3 High Middle Low Special ringtone any 4 8 Melody 1 5 Same internal ringtone Di...

Page 895: ... High Low 15 28 Melody 1 5 set in PRG15 02 When PRG20 04 05 is Off or When PRG20 04 05 is On and called from Internal IP7WW 12 24TXH B1 and IP7 8IPLD C1 IP4WW 12 24TXH B and IP4WW 24TIXH C PRG22 03 01 0 3 9 12 Tone Pattern PRG15 02 02 PRG22 03 01 4 8 Melody 1 3 High Middle Low 4 8 Melody 0 3 9 12 Tone Pattern 4 8 Melody 4 8 Melody 1 3 High Middle Low PRG15 28 01 0 Trunk Incoming Melody 1 5 set in ...

Page 896: ...gram that MUST be set from a default state for this feature to be enabled Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 04 01 Virtual Extension Numbering Extension Num ber Dial Up to 8 digits All Virtual Extension Port No Setting 15 02 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Ring Tone 1 High 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 2 Medium 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 3 Low 2W Digital IP Multi...

Page 897: ...erminal 3 Low 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 4 Melody1 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 5 Melody2 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melody3 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 7 Melody4 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 Melody5 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 0 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions Call Coverage Delay Interval 0 64800 seconds 10 15 02 21 Multiline Telephone Basic D...

Page 898: ...a Setup Toll Re striction Class 0 Virtual Extension Follows virtual extension Toll Class in PRG 21 04 1 Real Extension Follows physical stations Toll Class in PRG 21 04 1 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup In coming Ring Pattern 0 8 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming extension ring tone 5 Melody1 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melod...

Page 899: ...ng tone 1 Tone pattern 1 2 Tone pattern 2 3 Tone pattern 3 4 Tone pattern 4 5 Melody1 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 6 Melody2 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 7 Melody3 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 8 Melody4 2W Digital IP Multi line Terminal 0 Operation To answer a call ringing a Virtual Extension 1 Press the flashing Virtual Extension key OR Go off hook PRG 20 10 08 needs to be set to o...

Page 900: ...Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold key for a second time for Delayed Ring or Skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker key SL2100 ISSUE ...

Page 901: ... the user s or a co worker s mailbox After the Transfer goes through the caller can leave a message in the mailbox Voice Mail Queuing When accessing the voice mail the system provides a voice mail queue If all the voice mail ports are busy any calls trying to get to the voice mail are placed in queue As the voice mail ports become available the calls are connected to the voice mail in the order in...

Page 902: ... Up to four digits YYY Transfer Message User is transferring a call to VM Record a message to be placed in mail box of extension YYY Record Message for Called Extension QVM Record a message to be placed in mail box of extension YYY Store source exten sion number XXX for automatic reply feature 45 04 04 For ward All Up to four digits Default not as signed 3UUUZZZ Up to four digits UUUZZZ Up to four...

Page 903: ...alls do not follow extension call forwarding to voice mail Only one Voice Mail system can be installed in an SL2100 system Analog or Digital but not both in same system This restriction is because only one Department Group can be assigned for Voice Mail If installing an Analog Voice Mail System any Analog station port SLT port can be assigned to support the Analog Voice Mail system If installing a...

Page 904: ...Entry Operation Set Message Waiting Indication 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit No Setting 11 11 51 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Cancel Message Waiting Indication 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit No Setting 15 02 35 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Calling Extension 1 Cycle 1 2 Cycle 2 3 Cycle 3 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 3 15 02 36 Multiline Telephone B...

Page 905: ...p Basic Data Setup Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation 0 Manual Ring the extensions one at a time when the service code are pressed 1 Automatic Ring all exten sions 0 16 01 06 Department Group Basic Data Setup STG With draw Mode 0 Disabled Call will camp on to the group 1 Automatic Call follows PRG 22 11 11 0 16 01 07 Department Group Basic Data Setup Call Recall Restriction for STG 0 Disabled...

Page 906: ...bled 1 On ICM off hook signaling enabled COS 01 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override 0 Off manually 1 On automatically COS 01 15 1 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 20 13 12 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv ice Room Monitor Extension Being Monitored 0 Of...

Page 907: ...Mail De partment Group Number 0 No Voice Mail Assigned 1 50 Department Group 1 50 0 45 01 02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Mas ter Name Up to 12 Characters VOICE MAIL 45 01 04 Voice Mail Integration Options Park and Page 0 Off 1 On 1 45 01 05 Voice Mail Integration Options Message Wait 0 Off 1 On 1 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0 64800 seconds ...

Page 908: ... 0 Off 1 On 0 45 05 06 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Addi tional Digits Forward RNA 0 Off 1 On 0 45 05 07 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Addi tional Digits Remote Log On 0 Off 1 On 0 45 05 08 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Addi tional Digits Conversation Recording 0 Off 1 On 0 45 05 09 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Addi tional Digits Clear Down String 0 Off 1 ...

Page 909: ...0 dBm 4 20 dBm 45 dBm 5 25 dBm 50 dBm 6 30 dBm 55 dBm Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 04 02 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Min Detec tion Level 0 15 0 10 dBm 0 25 dBm 15 1 15 dBm 0 30 dBm 15 2 20 dBm 0 35 dBm 15 3 25 dBm 0 40 dBm 15 4 30 dBm 0 45 dBm 15 5 35 dBm 0 50 dBm 15 6 40 dBm 0 55 dBm 15 Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 80 04 03 Call Prog...

Page 910: ...ur security code Ask your Voice Mail system administrator for your security code Normally your Message Waiting LED goes out if applicable If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or a new General Message Single Line Terminal 1 Lift the handset and dial 8 If you are at a co worker s telephone you can dial the Voice Mail master number and your mailbox number instead You ...

Page 911: ...en pick the call back up You can restart and stop recording as required Single Line Terminal 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 654 The system automatically reconnects you to your call To stop recording hookflash twice You can restart and stop recording as required ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 1 897 V ...

Page 912: ...ew message indication Also the Voice Mail key flashes green Voice Mail LED is a higher priority then any other status for the DSS BLF key The enabling or disabling of Voice Mail Indication on BLF enables the station with the message to show up on other telephones It does not enable disable stations from seeing the BLF indication Virtual Extension Keys assigned as code 03 do not support Voice Mail ...

Page 913: ...attern Data 7 30 05 10 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 2 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 1 30 05 11 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 3 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 2 30 05 12 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 4 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 3 30 05 13 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 5 Hotel DSS 0 7 Lamp Pattern Data 5 30 05 14 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Stat...

Page 914: ...e extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold key 7 Press Speaker key To program a Voice Mail key on a telephone 1 Press Speaker key 2 Dial 751 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 77 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Speaker key SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 900 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys V ...

Page 915: ...format is Table 1 70 WAV Format Item Specification Bit Rate 64 kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 kHz Audio Format CCITT A law Size 2 MB Length 2 Min To upload the WAV file to the system please refer to InMail Upload Download Audio on page 1 466 Conditions The feature basically work with Normal Trunk Incoming call PBX CES Incoming Call DID DISA VRS DID DDI and Dial In in the ...

Page 916: ...ng terminal numbers are not related to the count of channels The Ringing priority is as follows CID Incoming Voice Melody Ring PRG13 04 07 CID Incoming Ring PRG13 04 05 Voice Melody ring for each extension PRG15 02 55 Normal Ring This feature can not be set from Navigation Key Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Digital Multiline Terminal Required Component s None Related Featu...

Page 917: ...ditional Digits when using ISDN functionality 3 Remote Monitor Dial Up to 8 digits No Setting 13 04 05 Speed Dialing Number and Name Incoming Ring Pattern 0 Normal System Ring Pattern 1 4 Tone Pattern 1 4 5 9 Scale Pattern 1 5 10 13 Tone Pattern 5 8 0 13 04 06 Speed Dialing Number and Name CR PR fea ture 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 13 04 07 Speed Dialing Number and Name VRS Message Number 0 100 0 15 02 5...

Page 918: ...3 04 03 TRF0 Not defined TRF1 Internal Dial TRF2 IRG TRG3 Remote Monitor ABB0005 TRF Mode 0 3 0 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 7 Press Hold and Enter the Ringing Destination 13 04 04 If you Select TRF1 3 following can be entered TRF1 Internal Dial Up to 36 digits TRF2 Incoming ring Group 0 50 TRF3 Remote Monitor Dial Up to 8 digits If you press Exit Key you can clear the digits you entered ABB00...

Page 919: ...13 04 07 ABB0005 ModeX VRS 001 ModeX X is Mode 1 3 PRG 13 04 03 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 10 If you set correctly you will hear the Confirmation Beep and see the following Screen Set ABB 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 11 Press Speaker and end the Setting To Cancel the Incoming Voice Melody ringing from Service Code 1 Press Service Code 778 VRS INCOM RI 1 STA 2 2W Digital IP Multiline Term...

Page 920: ... You can set Name PRG 13 04 02 ABB 0005 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 6 Press Hold and Enter the Transfer Mode 0 3 PRG13 04 03 TRF0 Not defined TRF1 Internal Dial TRF2 IRG TRG3 Remote Monitor ABB0005 TRF Mode 0 3 0 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 7 Press 0 and RI Set will be canceled Set ABB Cancel RI 2W Digital IP Multiline Terminal 8 Press Speaker SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 906 Voice Melody Ringing ...

Page 921: ... on a CPU Refer to the Conference feature for Conference circuit programming Voice Over can interrupt a trunk call only if the trunk is set up for at least six seconds Do not use Voice Over to a user on Speaker phone as the conversation may be heard by the outside party When a Multiline Terminal user performs Voice Over the speech path is 1 way from the originator to the destination The Voice Over...

Page 922: ...nded because the conversation may be heard by the outside party Answering a Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed Voice Over key Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Multiline and Single Line Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Conference Off Hook Signaling Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program No Program Name Input Data Default 11 ...

Page 923: ...lled party after the alert tone ends To use Service Code 690 for Voice Over PRG 11 16 09 Voice Mail Service Code must be undefined To respond to a Voice Over alert tone to your extension You can respond only if you have a Voice Over key 1 Press the Voice Over key The Voice Over key lights steadily green and you can talk to the interrupting party To return to your original call 1 Press the Voice Ov...

Page 924: ...ten record and erase VRS Messages unless restricted in programming DISA and DID callers can listen and record VRS messages unless restricted in programming General Message A General Message is a prerecorded message available to all callers A General Message typically contains important company information that all employees should hear To hear the General Message an employee can go to any Multilin...

Page 925: ...am 25 16 01 is set 0 this feature is deactivated If the timer value is longer than inter digit timer Program 21 01 03 the setting of Program 25 16 01 has no effect Simultaneous Call Answering With VRS installed the Automated Attendant can answer up to 16 calls Need optional hardware IP7WW EXIFB C1 simultaneously Flexible Routing The outside caller can directly dial any system extension Department ...

Page 926: ...t Function Number 53 Function Key 53 can be used to play the VRS Waiting Message immediately when Function Key 53 the ringing Trunk Appearance Key are pressed 20 07 13 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS Record VRS Msg Operation 20 15 11 Ring Cycle Setup VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No Answer Recall Time 22 01 08 System Options for I...

Page 927: ...de Setup for System Administrator VRS Record Erase Message 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 616 11 10 21 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS General Message Playback 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 611 11 10 22 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS Record or Erase General Message 0 9 Maximum of 8 digit 612 11 12 54 Service Code Setup for Service Access VRS Routing for ANI DNIS 0 9 Maximum of 8 ...

Page 928: ...tension Ring Group Assignment Extension Number Maximum eight Digits Group01 has 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 and 108 First 8 ports ringing 22 14 01 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed Mes sage Start Time 0 64800 seconds 0 22 14 02 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed Mes sage Number 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 22 14 03 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed Mes sage Sending Count...

Page 929: ...ting 0 25 06 01 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Next Attendant Message Number 0 100 0 No Setting 101 Voice Mail answers 104 Refer to Programming Manual 105 Dial the other extension 0 25 06 02 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Destination Number Up to eight digits Must be a valid extension number that is programmed in command 11 02 or 11 04 No Setting 25 07 02 System Timers for VRS DI...

Page 930: ...rin Chinese Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian 3 40 10 01 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS Fixed Message 0 Disable VRS fixed message will not be played 1 Enable VRS fixed message will be played 0 40 10 02 Voice Announcement Service Option General Message Number 0 100 0 No General Message Serv ice 0 40 10 03 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS No Answer Destination 0 50 Incomi...

Page 931: ...ing OR Hang up to save the message To listen to a previously recorded VRS message 1 Press Speaker key or lift the handset OR At a Single Line Terminal lift the handset 2 Dial 616 3 Dial 5 Listen 4 Dial the VRS message number to which you want to listen 01 100 You hear the previously recorded message If you hear a beep instead no previous message is recorded 5 Press to hear the message again OR To ...

Page 932: ...ed If you dialed 5 to listen you can dial 5 and the message number to hear it again or if you want to Record listen to or erase another message go back to step 4 General Message To listen to the General Message Multiline Terminal Only Your Message Waiting LED flashes when there is a new General Message A voice message periodically reminds you 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial 6...

Page 933: ...Station number check require PRG 40 10 01 VRS Fixed Message to be Enabled and PRG 20 08 05 to be disabled per Class of Service To check the extension number of any Multiline Terminal 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial 6 for extension number To check the system time and date from any Multiline Terminal extension 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker key 2 Dial 8 for time and...

Page 934: ...Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCITT A law μ law User Pro Access There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes to audio files but only one allows changes to be made to VRS messages To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SL2100 LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 User Admin Mode UA Mode This mode allows the user admin ...

Page 935: ...cond the message was left The table below shows how to interpret the message name to determine this information Table 1 71 Default Incoming Ringing Tone File Name Format BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav maximum 32 characters B Mailbox number maximum eight digits or VRS for the VRS message T Message Type Greeting or VRS message Recorded message NNN Message number three digits YYYY Year MM Month 1 12 DD Da...

Page 936: ...mately 2MB Files larger than this cannot be uploaded There is no size limitation when downloading audio files User Pro does not check the uploaded file for correct naming format i e BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav The file name will be automatically changed when the file is written in the System The actual file name of the messages is not displayed in User Pro The message number modified date and file s...

Page 937: ...session Please try again later When the file to be downloaded is being used by another session ei ther PC or telephone The selected file has already been deleted When the file selected for download has already been deleted The file is being used by another session Please try again later When the file selected for deletion is being used by another session The selected file has already been deleted ...

Page 938: ...umber The message numbers correspond to the same message number when accessed via the telephone Message 1 is 001 message 2 is 002 and message 3 is 003 etc 5 To delete a message click on the red X to the right of the appropriate message 6 To Upload a message Under Message No enter the message number to be replaced Browse to find the location where the greeting file is stored Click on the upload ico...

Page 939: ...the system broadcasts the second message John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call If John doesn t pick up the call the Page can be set to repeat once VRS Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls immediately rerouted This means that Park and Page activates for ringing Intercom calls DID calls and DISA calls It also activates for calls transferred from ...

Page 940: ...sions Class of Serv ice for Extensions 1 15 Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number 0 50 0 No setting All stations 1 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters Refer to the Program ming Manual for the default values 31 04 01 External Paging Zone Group Paging Group Nu...

Page 941: ...ial when the announcement is complete A paging chime overrides the first four seconds of an announcement Allow a delay in announcement recording for chime time 5 Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement For example for Internal Zone 1 dial 701 01 or for Combined Paging Zone 1 dial 1 1 6 Dial the Park and Page type 2 All Calls 3 Outside Calls Only 7 Press Speaker key to hang up or...

Page 942: ...RG 15 02 60 is enable When Navigation is enabled Contrast can be changed by using a Navigation mode Multiline Terminal users can further increase station ring volume by pressing Speaker key and dialing Code 729 Headset volume off hook ringing volume station ringing volume and Speaker volume adjustments are determined by PRG 15 02 27 The LCD of the SL2100 terminals provide a volume bar indication w...

Page 943: ...dial 729 If the telephone is ringing skip to step 2 2 Press the VOLUME or key To adjust the volume of ringing incoming Paging announcements Handsfree the handset or Background Music If the user is using a Navigation While receiving the call Up and Down Cursor keys will not adjust the Volume 1 Press the VOLUME or key The feature must be active to change the volume Pressing the volume keys when the ...

Page 944: ...abled the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered If an outside call is transferred to forwarded off premise using an outside trunk the warning tone timer begins immediately This occurs only if either trunk involved in the call is programmed for this feature PRG 14 01 17 When transferring...

Page 945: ...e Code 0 9 Set for one digit only No Setting 20 28 02 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Dis connect Code 0 9 Set for one digit only No Setting 20 28 03 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Continue Time 0 64800 seconds 0 21 01 01 System Options for Outgoing Calls Seizure Trunk Line Mode 0 Priority Route 1 Circular Route 0 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Inter digit Time...

Page 946: ...MEMO SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 1 932 Warning Tone for Long Conversation W ...

Page 947: ...ing Service Code 751 or 752 Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information SECTION 3 USING HANDSFREE The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree This lets a user just press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call For extensions without Automatic Handsfree the user must Lift the handset or press Speaker key for intercom dial tone Lift the handset or p...

Page 948: ...aiting 38 733 Set the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line Transfer 734 Cancel the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line Transfer 735 Set the Destination for Automat ic Trunk Transfer Transfer 1 Paging Group Number Make a Combined Page Paging 0 Cancel Call Forwarding Call Forwarding No setting After 001 128 busy Disconnect a call in progress on a trunk Forced Trunk Disconnect 5 Log out of or in...

Page 949: ... System VRS 9 Place a call using ARS or Trunk Group Routing Automatic Route Selection Trunk Group Routing 02 600 code 0 Use Dial Block Toll Restriction Dial Block 601 code 0 Aa a supervisor use Dial Block Toll Restriction Dial Block 602 Group number 01 50 Set Automatic Transfer Setup for each extension group Transfer 603 Group number 01 50 Cancel Automatic Transfer Set up Transfer 604 Group number...

Page 950: ...ake Up Call 633 Set a Wake Up Call for another guest room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 634 Cancel a Wake Up Call for an other guest room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 635 Enable Room to Room Call Re striction for a guest room tele phone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restric tion 636 Disable Room to Room Call Re striction for a guest room tele phone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restric ...

Page 951: ... 6 digit code line telephone num ber Override Toll Restriction Toll Restriction 672 Line number 001 128 Answer a call on a specific trunk Central Office Calls Answering Hold 675 Monitor a room telephone Hotel Motel Room Monitor 677 Change the COS of another ex tension Must be allowed in PRG 20 13 28 Class of Service 678 0 9 Change the language of a dis play telephone Alphanumeric Display Mainte na...

Page 952: ... Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing 722 Call off premise with a Door Box Call Forwarding Off Premise Door Box 54 723 Enable Forced Ringing for in coming Intercom calls Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom ringing 724 Enable disable Dial Pad Confir mation Tone Dialing Pad Confirmation tone 725 Turn Background Music on and off Background Mus...

Page 953: ...et Me Conference or Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the group paged Meet Me Paging 23 or 32 765 zone 0 3 Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an External Paging Zone Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging 23 or 32 768 pickup group 1 8 or 1 9 or 01 64 Answer a call ringing a tele phone in another pickup group except Ring Group calls Group Call Pickup 26 group 769 Answer a call ringing a...

Page 954: ...e Store Group Speed Dialing num bers 2 bin Dial a System Speed Dialing num ber 27 4 bin Dial a Group Speed Dialing number 28 7 bin Use Personal Speed Dialing Account Codes Enter Account code Enter an Account Code Hookflash Enter account code Hookflash Enter an Account Code at an SLT Alarm 727 1 or 2 time or 727 1 or 2 9999 to cancel Check set or cancel an alarm Alphanumeric Dis play 678 0 14 Selec...

Page 955: ...ack request 799 Test Callback operation for an SLT Central Office Calls Answering Hold 9 Use Universal Answer to pick up a call ringing over the paging system 672 Line number 001 128 Answer a call on a specific trunk 679 1 set or 0 cancel Change the ability for a second call with DID DISA DIL Central Office Calls Placing 0 001 128 Place a call over a specific trunk 01 trunk 001 128 645 trunk 1 blo...

Page 956: ...up 1 8 or 1 9 or 01 64 Answer a call ringing a telephone in another pickup group 26 group 769 Answer a call ringing a telephone in another pickup group if you do not know the group number except Ring Group calls 25 Handsfree Answer back Forced Inter com Ringing 1 Off Hook Change the signaling mode of your outgoing Intercom call 721 Enable Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls 723 Enable...

Page 957: ...ilable clean from another telephone Hotel Motel Room Status Printouts 642 Request a Room Status Printout Last Number Re dial 5 Use Last Number Redial 776 Clear number saved by Last Num ber Redial Maintenance No setting Back up system data 678 01 18 Display the language the telephone is using Meet Me Confer ence Meet Me Paging 763 Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an Internal Paging Zone...

Page 958: ...ging Internal 701 zone 01 50 701 zone 0 or 00 Make an Internal Zone Page Make an internal All Call Page 21 zone or 22 Park 6 orbit 01 50 Park a call in a system Park orbit 01 50 04 orbit 6 orbit 01 50 Pick up a call parked in a system Park orbit 01 50 04 orbit 757 Park a call or pick up a parked call at an extension Programmable Function Keys 751 key code Change the function of a program mable key...

Page 959: ...mode extension Set the destination for Automatic Transfer Setup for each extension group 605 Group number 01 50 Set Delayed Transfer for each ex tension group 606 Group number 01 50 Cancel Delayed Transfer 607 Group number 01 50 Set up DND for each extension group 608 Group number 01 50 Cancel DND for each extension group 624 Extension number Transfer a call into an existing call 782 Transfer a ca...

Page 960: ...sten to or erase a VRS Message 750 Camp On to an extension when call ing into the system through the VRS 782 Transfer a call to the VRS This can be used also to route ANI DNIS to the VRS Volume Control 729 Check or change ring volume Common Cancel ing Service Code 620 Use Common Canceling Service Code Function Key Codes by Feature Table 2 4 Function Key Codes by Feature To program a key press Spea...

Page 961: ...s key Place or answer a call to your co worker s extension Slow Flash red when ringing On red when busy Call For warding Both Ring Code 14 Operation Press key Dest Extension Call Forward Both Ring to extension Slowly flashes red 745 Call For warding Busy Code 11 Operation Press key Dest Extension Call Forward Busy to extension or Voice Mail Slowly flashes red 742 Call For warding Busy No Answer Co...

Page 962: ...partment Call ing Group On when removed Off when installed 650 Department Step Calling Code 36 Operation Dial busy ext Press key Step Call through a Department Group for an idle member None 4 Direct Sta tion Selec tion One Touch Call ing Code 01 Operation Press key dest ext or outside tel Hold Call an extension or outside number using a DSS key Off extension idle On extension busy Flashing DND Do ...

Page 963: ...our virtual phan tom extension Slow Flash red when ringing On red when busy Name Stor ing Code 55 Operation Press key ext name Hold Enter a name for the extension to be dis played on telephones None 700 Night Serv ice Code 09 mode 1 4 or 1 8 Operation Press key Activate the Day Night Mode On red when activa ted 718 0 Off Hook Signaling Code 33 Operation Call ext and receive busy Press key Signal a...

Page 964: ...and Page and VRS Per sonal Greeting Flashes red when ac tivated Serial Call Code 43 Operation Trk call Hold Ext Press key Place a Serial Call to a co worker None Step Call Code 36 Operation Press key Step through a de partment group None 4 Transfer Code 06 Operation Establish call Hold Ext Press key Transfer a call None Trunk Group Routing Code 05 Operation Press key Access a trunk using Trunk Gro...

Page 965: ...l Press key set up call to add Press key twice Conference Set up a conference or a Meet Me Con ference On red during setup 1 Code 08 Operation Press key Incoming Caller ID List List incoming caller ID to extension Flashing when new log created On in call log Code 09 mode 1 4 or 1 8 Operation Press key Night Service Activate the Day Night Mode On red when activated 718 mode 1 4 or 1 8 Code 10 Opera...

Page 966: ...24 Operation Speaker key Press Key Group Call Pickup Answer a call ring ing another tele phone in your Pick up Group None Code 25 Operation Speaker key Press key Group Call Pickup Answer a call ring ing a telephone in another Pickup Group if you do not know the group number None 769 Code 26 Pickup Group 1 32 Operation Speaker key Press key Pick up Group Group Call Pickup Answer a call ring ing a t...

Page 967: ...750 Code 36 Operation Dial busy ext Press key pswd 0000 place outside call Department Step Calling Step Call through a Department Group for an idle member None 708 Code 37 Operation Call extension Press key Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Override an exten sion Call Forward ing or Do Not Dis turb On red when activated 707 Code 38 Operation Leave message Call ext Press key OR Answer message...

Page 968: ...On red when activated Flashes when in DND Call Forward Code 50 Operation Press key Account Codes Enter Account Co des None or Code 55 Operation Do not Lift the handset Press key Enter extension number Enter name Press Hold Name Storing Change the name displayed on your display telephone None 700 Code 83 0 4 Operation Press key Voice Mail Use Voice Mail Service Flashes slowly when monitoring Code 7...

Page 969: ... Busy 696 No Answer 697 Code 97 Door phone 1 6 Operation Press key Doorphone Use Doorphone ac cess On when Doorphone Busy Fast flash when Door phone Incoming 702 Code 02 board 2 12 to cut the telephone power Operation Press key Ecology Set telephone pow er cut On when set 731 Code 03 Re mote Monitor Per mit key Operation Press key Security Set Remote Moni tor Slow flash when set Remote Monitor 610...

Page 970: ... 0 to can cel Automatic Call Dis tribution ACD Basic Operation Log in or out of an ACD Group On red when logged in Off when logged out 5 Code 13 Operation Press key Automatic Call Dis tribution ACD Rest Mode Enable disable Rest Mode On red when Rest Mode enabled Off when Rest Mode disabled Code 17 Operation Automatic Call Dis tribution ACD Work Time Enable disable Work Time On when Work Time enabl...

Page 971: ...ing Speed Dial S Account Code Forced Verified Unverified S Account Code Entry S Alarm S Alarm Reports E Alphanumeric Display S Analog Communications Interface ACI S Ancillary Device Connection S Answer Hold Automatic Hold S AspireNet S Attendant Call Queuing S Automatic Call Distribution ACD S Automatic Release S Automatic Route Selection ARS F Route S Background Music S Barge In S Battery Backup ...

Page 972: ...e Conference Recording S Conference Voice Call Privacy Release S Continued Dialing S Data Line Security S Delayed Ringing S Department Calling S Department Step Calling S DHCP Client S Dial Pad Confirmation Tone S Dial Tone Detection S Dialing Number Preview S Digital Trunk Clocking S Direct Inward Dialing DID E Direct Inward Line DIL S Direct Inward System Access DISA S Direct Station Selection D...

Page 973: ...el Toll Restriction When Checked In S Hotel Motel Wake Up Call S Hot Key Pad S Hotline S Howler Tone Service S InGuard Toll Fraud Guard S InMail S InMail Auto Setting S InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID S InMail Cascade Message Notification S InMail Email Notification S InMail Find Me Follow Me S InMail Language Setting S InMail Park and Page S InMail Upload Download Audio S Intercom E In...

Page 974: ...h Calling S Operator S Paging External S Paging External VRS S Paging Internal S Park S PBX Compatibility Behind PBX S PC Programming S Prime Line Selection S Private Line S Programmable Function Keys S Programming from a Multiline Terminal S Pulse to Tone Conversion S Redial Function S Repeat Redial S Resident System Program S Reverse Voice Over S Ring Groups S Ringdown Extension Hotline Internal...

Page 975: ...ne Override S Traffic Reports S Transfer S Trunk Group Routing S Trunk Groups S Trunk Queuing Camp On S Unicast Multicast Paging Mode S Uniform Call Distribution UCD S Universal Slot S User Programming Ability S Video Conference with Web RTC S Virtual Extensions S Voice Mail Integration Analog S Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys S Voice Melody Ringing by VM S Voice Over S Voice Response S...

Page 976: ...MEMO SL2100 ISSUE 1 0 3 6 Features Availability by Software Revision ...

Page 977: ...MEMO ISSUE 1 0 SL2100 Features and Specifications Manual 3 7 ...

Page 978: ...Features and Specifications Manual NEC Corporation ISSUE 1 0 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for UNIVERGE SL2100

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 2

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 6

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 142

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 68

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 68

Brand: Garmin Pages: 10

Brand: Balboa Water Group Pages: 88

R1000 series E20

Brand: Roland Pages: 156

Brand: Aiwa Pages: 30

Brand: T-audio Pages: 2

Brand: Coby Pages: 1

Brand: Micronix Pages: 16

Brand: Jensen Pages: 4

Brand: Hannlomax Pages: 2

TraxOil OM3-020P

Brand: Emerson Pages: 3

Brand: Emerson Pages: 15

White Rodgers 50A65-5165

Brand: Emerson Pages: 8

Brand: Emerson Pages: 14

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands